MIMO (eRAN13.1 02)

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter

Description
Issue 02
Date 2019-01-21
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description Contents
Contents
1 Change History.............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 eRAN13.1 02 (2019-01-21)............................................................................................................................................1
1.2 eRAN13.1 01 (2018-04-10)............................................................................................................................................1
1.3 eRAN13.1 Draft C (2018-03-30)....................................................................................................................................1
1.4 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (FDD)........................................................................................................................ 2
1.5 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (TDD)........................................................................................................................2
1.6 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (FDD)........................................................................................................................2
1.7 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (TDD)....................................................................................................................... 3
2 About This Document.................................................................................................................. 4

2.1 Applicable RAT.............................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 Features in This Document.............................................................................................................................................4
2.3 Feature Differences Between FDD and TDD.................................................................................................................5
3 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Definition........................................................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Benefits........................................................................................................................................................................... 7
4 Downlink MIMO........................................................................................................................ 11
4.1 Downlink Transmission................................................................................................................................................ 11
4.1.1 Transmission Solutions and Modes........................................................................................................................... 13
4.1.2 Transmission Mode Configuration............................................................................................................................ 14
4.1.2.1 Initial Transmission Modes.................................................................................................................................... 14
4.1.2.2 Transmission Modes in Scheduling........................................................................................................................15
4.1.3 Network Analysis...................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.1.3.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.1.3.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................16
4.1.4 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 17
4.1.4.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 17
4.1.4.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................17
4.1.4.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.1.4.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................18
4.1.5 Operation and Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................18
4.1.5.1 Data Configuration................................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1.5.1.1 Data Preparation.................................................................................................................................................. 18
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

eRAN
4.1.5.1.2 Using MML Commands...................................................................................................................................... 18

4.1.5.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.1.5.2 Verification and Monitoring................................................................................................................................... 19
4.2 CRS Port Mapping (FDD)............................................................................................................................................ 20
4.3 CRS Port Mapping (TDD)............................................................................................................................................22
4.4 CRS Port Mapping Detection and Reconfiguration (FDD)..........................................................................................24
4.4.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.4.1.1 Detection and Reconfiguration............................................................................................................................... 24
4.4.1.2 Example.................................................................................................................................................................. 26
4.4.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.4.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................27
4.4.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 27
4.4.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 27
4.4.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................27
4.4.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 28
4.4.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................29
4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO..............................................................................................................................................................32
4.5.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 32
4.5.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 32
4.5.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................33
4.5.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 33
4.5.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 33
4.5.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................33
4.5.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 34
4.5.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................34
4.5.4.1.2 Using MML Commands (FDD).......................................................................................................................... 35
4.5.4.1.3 Using MML Commands (TDD).......................................................................................................................... 35
4.5.4.1.4 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.6 DL 4x2 MIMO (FDD).................................................................................................................................................. 36
4.6.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 36
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

eRAN
4.6.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.6.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................37
4.6.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 38
4.6.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 38
4.6.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................38
4.6.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 38
4.6.3.4 Networking............................................................................................................................................................. 38
4.6.3.5 Others......................................................................................................................................................................39
4.6.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 42
4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO..............................................................................................................................................................42
4.7.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 42
4.7.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 43
4.7.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................44
4.7.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 44
4.7.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 45
4.7.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................45
4.7.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 45
4.7.3.4 Networking (FDD)................................................................................................................................................. 46
4.7.3.5 Networking (TDD)................................................................................................................................................. 47
4.7.3.6 Others......................................................................................................................................................................48
4.7.4.1.4 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 52
4.8 TX Channel Calibration................................................................................................................................................53
5 Uplink MIMO.............................................................................................................................. 55
5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive Diversity................................................................................................................................. 55
5.1.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 55
5.1.1.1 1T2R Cell............................................................................................................................................................... 56
5.1.1.2 2T2R Cell............................................................................................................................................................... 56
5.1.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 58
5.1.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................58
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

eRAN
5.1.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 58
5.1.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 58
5.1.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................59
5.1.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 59
5.1.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................59
5.1.4.1.4 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 61
5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity................................................................................................................................. 62
5.2.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 62
5.2.1.1 2T4R Cell (FDD)....................................................................................................................................................62
5.2.1.2 4T4R Cell............................................................................................................................................................... 64
5.2.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 67
5.2.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................68
5.2.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 68
5.2.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 68
5.2.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................69
5.2.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 69
5.2.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................69
5.2.4.1.4 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 72
5.3 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity (TDD)..................................................................................................................... 73
5.3.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................75
5.3.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 75
5.3.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 75
5.3.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................75
5.3.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 75
5.3.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................76
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

eRAN

5.3.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 77
5.4 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO (FDD).......................................................................................................................................... 79
5.4.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 79
5.4.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 79
5.4.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................79
5.4.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 81
5.4.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 81
5.4.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................81
5.4.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 82
5.4.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................82
5.4.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 83
5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO......................................................................................................................................................84
5.5.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 84
5.5.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 85
5.5.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................86
5.5.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 87
5.5.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 88
5.5.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................88
5.5.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 89
5.5.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................89
5.5.4.1 Data Configuration (FDD)......................................................................................................................................89
5.5.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.5.4.2 Data Configuration (TDD)..................................................................................................................................... 90
5.5.4.2.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 91
5.6 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO (TDD).......................................................................................................................................... 92
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

eRAN
5.6.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 92
5.6.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 92
5.6.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................92
5.6.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 93
5.6.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 94
5.6.3.2 Software..................................................................................................................................................................94
5.6.3.3 Hardware................................................................................................................................................................ 94
5.6.3.4 Others......................................................................................................................................................................94
5.6.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................... 95
5.7 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO (TDD).......................................................................................................................................... 97
5.7.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................... 97
5.7.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................... 98
5.7.2.2 Impacts....................................................................................................................................................................98
5.7.3 Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 99
5.7.3.1 Licenses.................................................................................................................................................................. 99
5.7.3.2 Software................................................................................................................................................................100
5.7.3.3 Hardware.............................................................................................................................................................. 100
5.7.3.4 Others....................................................................................................................................................................100
5.7.4 Operation and Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................100
5.7.4.1 Data Configuration............................................................................................................................................... 101
5.7.4.1.1 Data Preparation................................................................................................................................................ 101
5.7.4.1.2 Using MML Commands.................................................................................................................................... 101
5.7.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................. 101
5.7.4.2 Verification and Monitoring................................................................................................................................. 102
5.8 UL SU-MIMO............................................................................................................................................................ 103
5.8.1 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 103
5.8.1.1 Uplink Transmission Modes.................................................................................................................................103
5.8.1.2 Rank Selection...................................................................................................................................................... 103
5.8.1.3 SRS Configuration Policy (TDD).........................................................................................................................104
5.8.2 Network Analysis.................................................................................................................................................... 104
5.8.2.1 Benefits................................................................................................................................................................. 104
5.8.2.2 Impacts..................................................................................................................................................................104
5.8.3 Requirements........................................................................................................................................................... 106
5.8.3.1 Licenses................................................................................................................................................................ 106
5.8.3.2 Software................................................................................................................................................................106
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

eRAN
5.8.3.3 Hardware.............................................................................................................................................................. 107

5.8.3.4 Others....................................................................................................................................................................108
5.8.4 Operation and Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................108
5.8.4.1 Data Configuration (FDD)....................................................................................................................................108
5.8.4.1.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................. 110
5.8.4.2 Data Configuration (TDD)....................................................................................................................................110
5.8.4.2.3 Using the CME.................................................................................................................................................. 111
5.8.4.3 Verification and Monitoring..................................................................................................................................111
6 Parameters................................................................................................................................... 114
7 Counters...................................................................................................................................... 194
8 Glossary....................................................................................................................................... 264
9 Reference Documents............................................................................................................... 265
Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 1 Change History
1 Change History
This chapter describes changes not included in the "Parameters", "Counters", "Glossary", and
"Reference Documents" chapters. These changes include:
l Technical changes
Changes in functions and their corresponding parameters
l Editorial changes
Improvements or revisions to the documentation
1.1 eRAN13.1 02 (2019-01-21)

This issue includes the following changes.
Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
Revised descriptions in the document.
1.2 eRAN13.1 01 (2018-04-10)

Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
Optimized descriptions in this document.
1.3 eRAN13.1 Draft C (2018-03-30)

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

eRAN
Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
l Added deactivation command examples. For details, see the respective "Using MML
Commands" sections.
l Described TX channel calibration. For details, see 4.8 TX Channel Calibration.
l Optimized descriptions in this document.
1.4 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (FDD)

Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
Revised descriptions in this document.
1.5 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (TDD)

Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
Revised descriptions in this document.
1.6 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (FDD)

This issue introduces the following changes to eRAN13.0 01 (2017-09-05).

eRAN
Technical Changes
Change Description Parameter Change Base Station
Model
Removed the single frequency None l 3900 and

network (SFN) function from the 5900 series
list of mutually exclusive base stations
functions of uplink single user l DBS3900
multiple-input multiple-output LampSite
(SU-MIMO). However, uplink and
joint reception does not apply to DBS5900
UEs performing rank 2 LampSite
transmission in TM2. For details,
see 5.8.3.2 Software and 5.8.2.2 l BTS3912E
Impacts. l BTS3911E
Removed uplink multi-cluster None

from the list of mutually exclusive
features of uplink SU-MIMO in
5.8.3.2 Software.
Optimized CRS port mapping Added parameters: 3900 and 5900

detection and reconfiguration. For GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetect series base
detail, see 4.4 CRS Port Mapping Method stations
Detection and Reconfiguration
(FDD).
Editorial Changes
Incorporated both FDD and TDD descriptions into this document.
Reorganized this document using a new template.
1.7 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (TDD)

This issue introduces the following changes to eRAN TDD 13.0 01 (2017-09-05).
Technical Changes
None
Editorial Changes
Incorporated both FDD and TDD descriptions into this document.
Reorganized this document using a new template.

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 2 About This Document
2 About This Document
2.1 Applicable RAT

This document applies to FDD/TDD.
2.2 Features in This Document

This document describes the following FDD features:
Feature ID Feature Name Section
LOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO 4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO
LOFD-001003 DL 4x2 MIMO 4.6 DL 4x2 MIMO (FDD)
LOFD-001060 DL 4x4 MIMO 4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO
LBFD-00202001 UL 2-Antenna Receive 5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive

Diversity Diversity
LOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive 5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive

Diversity Diversity
LOFD-001002 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO 5.4 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO (FDD)
LOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO 5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
LOFD-130201 UL SU-MIMO 5.8 UL SU-MIMO
This document describes the following TDD features:
TDLOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO 4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO
TDLOFD-001060 DL 4x4 MIMO 4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO

eRAN
TDLBFD-00202001 UL 2-Antenna Receive 5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive

Diversity Diversity
TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive 5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive

Diversity Diversity
TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive 5.3 UL 8-Antenna Receive

Diversity Diversity (TDD)
TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO 5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO 5.6 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)
TDLOFD-130203 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO 5.7 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)
TDLOFD-120201 UL SU-MIMO 5.8 UL SU-MIMO
2.3 Feature Differences Between FDD and TDD

FDD FDD TDD TDD Difference Section
Feature Feature Feature Feature
ID Name ID Name
LOFD-001 DL 2x2 TDLOFD- DL 2x2 None 4.5 DL 2x2

001 MIMO 001001 MIMO MIMO
LOFD-001 DL 4x2 N/A N/A This feature is 4.6 DL 4x2

003 MIMO supported only MIMO (FDD)
by FDD.
LOFD-001 DL 4x4 TDLOFD- DL 4x4 None 4.7 DL 4x4

060 MIMO 001060 MIMO MIMO
LBFD-002 UL 2- TDLBFD- UL 2- None 5.1 UL 2-

02001 Antenna 00202001 Antenna Antenna
Receive Receive Receive
Diversity Diversity Diversity
LOFD-001 UL 4- TDLOFD- UL 4- None 5.2 UL 4-

005 Antenna 001005 Antenna Antenna
Receive Receive Receive
Diversity Diversity Diversity
N/A N/A TDLOFD- UL 8- This feature is 5.3 UL 8-

001062 Antenna supported only Antenna
Receive by TDD. Receive
Diversity Diversity
(TDD)

eRAN
FDD FDD TDD TDD Difference Section

Feature Feature Feature Feature
ID Name ID Name
LOFD-001 UL 2x2 N/A N/A This feature is 5.4 UL 2x2

002 MU- supported only MU-MIMO
MIMO by FDD. (FDD)
LOFD-001 UL 2x4 TDLOFD- UL 2x4 In TDD, uplink 5.5 UL 2x4

058 MU- 001058 MU- MU-MIMO MU-MIMO
MIMO MIMO enhancement
functions are
supported. In
FDD, these
functions are
not supported.
N/A N/A TDLOFD- UL 2x8 This feature is 5.6 UL 2x8

MIMO by TDD. (TDD)
N/A N/A TDLOFD- UL 4x8 This feature is 5.7 UL 4x8

MIMO by TDD. (TDD)
LOFD-130 UL SU- TDLOFD- UL SU- In TDD, 5.8 UL SU-

201 MIMO 120201 MIMO resource MIMO
allocation for
SRS
transmissions
from two
antenna ports
must be
prioritized for
uplink SU-
MIMO.
In FDD, this
type of resource
allocation does
not need to be
prioritized for
uplink SU-
MIMO.

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 3 Overview
3 Overview
3.1 Definition
Multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) refers to the use of multiple antennas for
transmission and reception in a cell. Multiple antenna configurations are expressed in the
form mxn MIMO, where m represents the number of transmit (TX) antennas and n represents
the number of receive (RX) antennas. For example, downlink 2x2 MIMO means that the
eNodeB uses two antennas for transmission and the UE uses two antennas for reception;
downlink 4x4 MIMO means that the eNodeB uses four antennas for transmission and the UE
uses four antennas for reception.
NOTE
In this document, multiple antennas refer to multiple TX/RX ports, not multiple physical antennas.
3.2 Benefits
Table 3-1 lists the benefits provided by multiple-antenna reception and transmission.
Table 3-1 Benefits

Benefits Description Provided By
Array gains Improved signal reception quality Multiple RX antennas
Multiplexing gains Increased cell throughput Multiple TX and RX

antennas
Diversity gains Improved signal reception quality Multiple TX or RX antennas
Power gains Improved signal reception quality Multiple TX antennas

eRAN
Array Gains
Array gains are achieved by utilizing the correlation between signals and non-correlation
between noises on different antennas. The signals are combined to increase the average signal
to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) and improve reception quality, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Array gains
Multiplexing Gains
Multiplexing gains are provided by multiple spatial channels. This increases cell throughput
by using multiple antennas, without the need for additional bandwidth or transmit power, as
shown in Figure 3-2.

eRAN
Figure 3-2 Multiplexing gains
Diversity Gains
Diversity gains are achieved by taking advantage of the non-correlation between deep fading
on different antennas. The signals are combined to reduce fading and improve reception
quality, as shown in Figure 3-3.

eRAN
Figure 3-3 Diversity gains
Power Gains
Power gains are offered by multiple TX antennas in noise-limited scenarios to increase the
SINR at the RX end and improve reception quality.

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 4 Downlink MIMO
4 Downlink MIMO
4.1 Downlink Transmission

This section discusses downlink MIMO on the eNodeB side. For more details, see section 7.1
"UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel" in 3GPP TS 36.213
V10.6.0.
Downlink Transmission Procedure

Figure 4-1 illustrates the downlink transmission procedure in the logical and physical aspects:
l The process up to "CRS port" involves transmission solutions and transmission modes in
the logical aspect.
l The process from "CRS port" onwards involves mapping between cell-specific reference
signal (CRS) ports and physical TX channels.
NOTE
The number of CRS ports cannot exceed the number of configured TX channels.
Figure 4-1 Downlink transmission procedure
The following explains the MIMO-specific concepts introduced in Figure 4-1:

l Codeword
Different codewords represent different data streams. LTE supports a maximum of two
codewords.
When two or more antennas are available at both the TX and RX ends, the number of
codewords depends on radio channel conditions and UE categories. Dual-codeword

eRAN
transmission is mainly used in scenarios with high SINRs, low channel correlations, and
UE categories of 2 or above.
l Rank
If the codeword rank is 1, the eNodeB typically uses transmit diversity. Alternatively, the
eNodeB can use transmission mode 6 (TM6), which is a special form of closed-loop
spatial multiplexing in rank 1.
If the codeword rank is greater than 1, the eNodeB uses spatial multiplexing.
l Layer mapping and precoding
Layer mapping and precoding are used to map codewords onto CRS ports.
– In layer mapping, codewords are mapped onto layers. The number of layers (also
called MIMO layers) is determined by the rank. The maximum number of layers is
determined by the number of CRS ports, as shown in Table 4-1.
– In precoding, layered data streams are mapped onto CRS ports.
l CRS port
CRS ports are logical antenna ports. According to protocols, a cell can be configured
with one, two, or four CRS ports. The number of CRS ports is specified by the
Cell.CrsPortNum parameter. Table 4-1 describes the logical antenna ports used as CRS
ports.
Table 4-1 Logical antenna ports used as CRS ports

Number Logical Antenna Ports Description
of CRS
Ports
1 Port 0 The eNodeB can select only single-

codeword transmission, which is not a
MIMO solution.
2 Ports 0 and 1 A maximum of two layers can be

selected.
4 Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 A maximum of four layers can be

selected.
Example
Figure 4-2 illustrates layer mapping and precoding when the number of CRS ports is four.

eRAN
Figure 4-2 Example of layer mapping and precoding
4.1.1 Transmission Solutions and Modes

Once the number of CRS ports has been determined, the transmission solution then depends
on the transmission mode.
Table 4-2 describes the available transmission solutions with two CRS ports in different
transmission modes.
Table 4-2 Transmission solutions with two CRS ports

Transmission Solution Number of Number Rank Transmission
Codewords of Layers Mode
Space frequency block coding 1 2 1 TM2

(SFBC), a form of transmit
diversity
Large-delay cyclic delay 2 2 2 TM3

diversity (CDD) precoding, a
form of open-loop spatial
multiplexing
Precoding without CDD, a 1 1 1 TM6

form of closed-loop spatial
multiplexing 2 2 2 TM4

eRAN
Table 4-3 describes the available transmission solutions with four CRS ports in different
transmission modes.
Table 4-3 Transmission solutions with four CRS ports
Transmission Solution Number of Number Rank Transmission

Codewords of Layers Mode
SFBC + frequency switched 1 4 1 TM2

transmit diversity (SFBC
+FSTD), a form of transmit
diversity
Large-delay CDD precoding, 2 2 2 TM3

a form of open-loop spatial
multiplexing 2 3 3
2 4 4
Precoding without CDD, a 1 1 1 TM6

form of closed-loop spatial
multiplexing 2 2 2 TM4, TM9, or
TM10
2 3 3
2 4 4
4.1.2 Transmission Mode Configuration

Transmission modes in random access and in subsequent scheduling are configured using
different parameters. The former is called initial transmission modes and the latter is called
transmission modes in scheduling.
4.1.2.1 Initial Transmission Modes

Initial transmission modes are determined by the following parameters:
l CellMimoParaCfg.InitialMimoType: specifies an initial transmission type.

l CellMimoParaCfg.MimoAdaptiveSwitch: specifies whether to use an adaptive
transmission mode.
l CellMimoParaCfg.FixedMimoMode: specifies a fixed transmission mode.
Table 4-4 Initial transmission modes
InitialMimo MimoAdaptiveS Initial Initial Transmission

Type Setting witch Setting Transmission Mode for Non-
Mode for Contention-based
Contention- Random Access
based Random
Access
TM2 N/A TM2

eRAN
InitialMimo MimoAdaptiveS Initial Initial Transmission

Type Setting witch Setting Transmission Mode for Non-
Mode for Contention-based
Contention- Random Access
based Random
Access
ADAPTIVE NO_ADAPTIVE Determined by the

CellMimoParaCfg.FixedMimoMode
parameter value
OL_ADAPTIVE TM3 TM2
CL_ADAPTIVE TM4 TM2
OC_ADAPTIVE TM3 TM2
4.1.2.2 Transmission Modes in Scheduling
TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6

TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6 are configured by the following parameters:
l CellMimoParaCfg.MimoAdaptiveSwitch: specifies whether to use an adaptive
transmission mode.
l CellMimoParaCfg.FixedMimoMode: specifies a fixed transmission mode.
Table 4-5 Transmission modes in scheduling

MimoAdaptiveSwitch Setting FixedMimoMode Transmission Mode in
Setting Scheduling
NO_ADAPTIVE TM2 TM2
TM3 TM3
TM4 TM4
TM6 TM6
OL_ADAPTIVE N/A TM3
CL_ADAPTIVE TM4
OC_ADAPTIVE TM3 or TM4
TM9 and TM10 (FDD)

In FDD, TM9 or TM10 is recommended in low-speed cells if a certain proportion of UEs
support TM9 or TM10. TM9 and TM10 are controlled by the TM9Switch and TM10Switch
options of the CellAlgoSwitch.EnhMIMOSwitch parameter, respectively. TM9 and TM10
cannot be enabled simultaneously for a cell.

eRAN
l TM9 is suitable for 2T cells with adaptive single frequency network (SFN) enabled and
4T cells with multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) enabled.
l TM10 is suitable for 4T cells with adaptive SFN enabled.
For the applications of TM9 and TM10 in adaptive SFN cells, see SFN. For details about MU-
MIMO in TM9 in 4T cells, see eMIMO (FDD).
4.1.3 Network Analysis
4.1.3.1 Benefits
Transmission modes need to be configured based on network situations. Open-loop adaptation
is recommended for the following types of cells:
l Cells served by combined RRUs
l Cells with the "RRU Channel Cross Connection Under MIMO" function enabled
l Cells with the high speed mobility function enabled
l Cells with a radius of over 100 km (FDD)
4.1.3.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
RAT Function Function Switch Reference Description
Name
FDD eMBMS phase CellMBMSCfg.M eMBMS UE services to be

TDD 1 based on BMSSwitch transmitted in TM9
centralized cannot be scheduled in
MCE MBSFN subframes
architecture where the physical
multicast channel
(PMCH) exists.
FDD Enhanced MBSFNShutDown Energy UE services to be

TDD symbol power Switch option of Conservation transmitted in TM9
saving the and Emission cannot be scheduled in
CellAlgoSwitch.Dl Reduction MBSFN subframes that
SchSwitch are configured for
parameter enhanced symbol power
saving.

eRAN

Name
FDD LCS ENodeBAlgoSwitc LCS UE services to be

h.LcsSwitch transmitted in TM9
cannot be scheduled in
subframes where
OTDOA-based
positioning reference
signals are transmitted.
TDD Beamforming CellAlgoSwitch.Bf Beamforming The parameters in the

AlgoSwitch (TDD) CellMimoParaCfg MO
take effect only when
beamforming is either
disabled or not supported
by hardware.
If adaptation between
beamforming and MIMO
is required, you can use
the
CellBfMimoParaCfg.Bf
MimoAdaptiveSwitch
parameter for
configuration. For
details, see Beamforming
(TDD).
4.1.4 Requirements
4.1.4.1 Licenses
None
4.1.4.2 Software
Prerequisite Functions
None
Mutually Exclusive Functions

None
4.1.4.3 Hardware
Transmission modes in different MIMO cells have different hardware requirements. For
details, see the descriptions of specific downlink MIMO features.

eRAN
4.1.4.4 Others
None
4.1.5 Operation and Maintenance
4.1.5.1 Data Configuration
4.1.5.1.1 Data Preparation

Table 4-6 describes the parameters used for function activation.
Table 4-6 Parameters used for activation

Parameter Name Parameter ID Setting Notes
Initial Mimo Type CellMimoParaCfg.Initial The value ADAPTIVE is

MimoType recommended.
MIMO Adaptive Switch CellMimoParaCfg.Mimo The value NO_ADAPTIVE is

AdaptiveSwitch recommended generally.
The value CL_ADAPTIVE is
recommended if the benefits of
closed-loop adaptation have
been verified.
Fixed MIMO Mode CellMimoParaCfg.Fixed This parameter is valid when the

MimoMode MimoAdaptiveSwitch
parameter is set to
NO_ADAPTIVE.
The value TM3 is
recommended.
4.1.5.1.2 Using MML Commands
Fixed Transmission Mode

//Setting a fixed transmission mode for a cell
MOD CELLMIMOPARACFG:
LocalCellId=0,MimoAdaptiveSwitch=NO_ADAPTIVE,FixedMimoMode=TM3,InitialMimoType=ADA
PTIVE;
Adaptive Transmission Mode

//Configuring sounding reference signal (SRS) resources
MOD SRSCFG: LocalCellId=0,SrsCfgInd=BOOLEAN_TRUE;
//Enabling closed-loop adaptation for a cell

MOD CELLMIMOPARACFG:
LocalCellId=0,MimoAdaptiveSwitch=CL_ADAPTIVE,InitialMimoType=ADAPTIVE;

eRAN
4.1.5.1.3 Using the CME

For detailed operations, see CME-based Feature Configuration.
4.1.5.2 Verification and Monitoring
Activation Verification
Enable a UE to access the network. Start Uu interface tracing on the U2000 client and check
the transmissionMode information element (IE) in the RRC_CONN_SETUP message. Table
4-7 lists the results indicating that the eNodeB has successfully delivered transmission mode
information. Figure 4-3 shows an example IE value contained in the message.
Table 4-7 IE values indicating that transmission modes have taken effect
Value of the transmissionMode IE Transmission Mode That Has Taken

Effect
tm2 TM2
tm3 TM3
tm4 TM4
tm6 TM6
Figure 4-3 RRC_CONN_SETUP message containing the IE value tm2

eRAN
Network Monitoring
N/A
4.2 CRS Port Mapping (FDD)

To avoid the adjustment of antenna connections after RF modules are connected to physical
antennas, CRS port mapping is introduced to map CRS ports onto the TX channels of RF
modules and further onto the physical antennas. CRS port mapping is required in cells
working in at least 4T mode. Signal correlation between antennas varies depending on
polarization direction. Adjusting CRS port mapping can optimize signal correlation.
NOTE
CRS port mapping can be understood as mapping CRS ports onto the TX ports of RF modules. The
sequence of TX/RX ports of an RF module is fixed. For details, see the hardware description of the
corresponding RF module.
CRS port mapping is controlled by the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter. By adjusting this

parameter, you can change the mapping between CRS ports and TX channels. The rest of this
section describes CRS port sequence and CRS port mapping configuration using the example
of a 4T4P cell (a cell with four TX channels and four CRS ports).
CRS Port Sequence

Figure 4-4 illustrates the default and recommended configurations for a 4T4P cell on the
assumption that the physical antennas are installed in non-cross mode.
l The default configuration refers to the default mapping between CRS ports and TX
channels. It is used when the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter is set to NOT_CFG.
For a 4T RRU, ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 are mapped onto TX channels A, B, C, and D,
respectively.
For two combined 2T RRUs, ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 are mapped onto TX channels A, B, A,
and B, respectively.
l The recommended configuration is as follows:
– For a 4T RRU, set the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter to 4T4P_0321 to map CRS
ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 onto TX channels A, D, C, and B.
– For combined 2T RRUs, set the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter to 4T4P_0213 to map
CRS ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 onto TX channels A, A, B, and B.

eRAN
Figure 4-4 RRU-antenna connection in non-cross mode
Using the same setting for the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter results in different CRS port
sequences on a 4T RRU and two combined 2T RRUs.
l For a 4T RRU, the digital sequence (ports 0, 1, 2, and 3) indicates the CRS port sequence
on channels A, B, C, and D. However, the default channel sequence on RRU hardware is
ACDB.
l For two combined 2T RRUs, the digital sequence (ports 0, 1, 2, and 3) indicates the CRS
port sequence on channels A, B, A, and B.
For example, if the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter is set to 4T4P_0213, then:
l For a 4T RRU, the theoretical channel sequence and CRS port sequence are .
However, the actual sequences are .

l For two combined 2T RRUs, the theoretical channel sequence and CRS port sequence
are . The actual sequences are the same as the theoretical sequences.
CRS Port Mapping Configuration

Table 4-8 lists the CRS port sequences that apply for each setting of the Cell.CrsPortMap
parameter for different RRUs.

eRAN
Table 4-8 CrsPortMap settings and actual CRS port sequences

4T4P or CrsPortMap CRS Port CRS Port Sequence on TX
4T2P Setting Sequence on TX Channels ABAB of Two
Channels ACDB Combined 2T RRUs
of a 4T RRU
4T4P 4T4P_0213 0132 0213 (recommended for

downlink 4x2 or 4x4 MIMO)
4T4P_0231 0312 0231
4T4P_0123 or 0231 0123

NOT_CFG
4T4P_0132 0321 0132
4T4P_0312 0123 0312
4T4P_0321 0213 0321

(recommended for
downlink 4x2 or
4x4 MIMO)
4T2P 4T2P_0011 or 0110 0011 (recommended for

NOT_CFG downlink 2x2 MIMO)
4T2P_0101 0011 (recommended 0101

for downlink 2x2
MIMO)
4T2P_0110 0101 0110
NOTE
The CRS port mapping principle for 4T2P cells is similar to that for 4T4P cells. The principle is not
described here but the actual sequences indicated by the parameter settings are provided in this table.
4T1P cells do not require CRS port mapping. The Cell.CrsPortMap parameter needs to be set to
NOT_CFG.
If a cell is set up on an LBBPc, the number of CRS ports is equal to the number of physical antennas and
the Cell.CrsPortNum parameter does not take effect. For example, if the LBBPc is configured to
support 2T mode, the number of CRS ports is always 2, regardless of the Cell.CrsPortNum parameter
value.
4.3 CRS Port Mapping (TDD)

To avoid the adjustment of antenna connections after RF modules are connected to physical
antennas, CRS port mapping is introduced to map CRS ports onto the TX channels of RF
modules and further onto the physical antennas.
The polarization directions and spacing of physical antennas have impact on the performance
of downlink MIMO. As shown in Figure 4-5, physical antennas with the same polarization
direction have high channel correlation, and a smaller spacing leads to even higher
correlation. Physical antennas with different polarization directions have low channel
correlation, but a larger spacing leads to even lower correlation.

eRAN
Figure 4-5 Correlation between antennas with four ports
Open-loop spatial multiplexing and closed-loop spatial multiplexing have different

requirements for CRS port mapping. It is recommended that CRS ports 0, 2, 1, and 3 or CRS
ports 0, 2, 3, and 1 be mapped onto physical antennas +45°, -45°, +45°, and -45°.
The mapping of CRS ports onto physical antennas is determined by the TX channel sequence
and the antenna connection mode. For example, the channel sequence of an integrated RRU is
(A, B, C, D). CRS ports 0, 2, 3, and 1 of the integrated RRU are mapped onto physical
antennas +45°, -45°, +45°, and -45° respectively by default.
The mapping of CRS ports onto TX channels is specified by the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter.
NOTE
The LBBPc does not support CRS port mapping. The parameter value NOT_CFG takes effect
regardless of the actual setting of Cell.CrsPortMap.
4TnR Cell
For the LBBPc, the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter can only be set to NOT_CFG because the
LBBPc does not support CRS port transmit sequence changes. For the LBBPd/UBBP/
UBBPe/UBBPei, the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter can be set to one of the CRS port transmit
sequences listed in the following table. Note that the Cell.CrsPortNum parameter must be set
to the number of CRS ports.
CRS Port Transmit Sequence on Value of Cell.CrsPortMap for 4TnR

Physical Antennas (+45º, -45º, +45º,
and -45º)
0, 2, 1, 3 4T4P_0213
0, 2, 3, 1 4T4P_0231
0, 1, 2, 3 4T4P_0123
0, 1, 3, 2 4T4P_0132
0, 1, 1, 0 4T2P_0110
0, 1, 0, 1 4T2P_0101

eRAN
CRS Port Transmit Sequence on Value of Cell.CrsPortMap for 4TnR

Physical Antennas (+45º, -45º, +45º,
and -45º)
0, 0, 1, 1 4T2P_0011
8TnR Cell
For the LBBPd/UBBP/UBBPe/UBBPei, the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter can be set to one of
the CRS port transmit sequences listed in the following table. Note that the Cell.CrsPortNum
parameter must be set to the number of CRS ports.
CRS Port Transmit Sequence on Value of Cell.CrsPortMap for 8T8R

Physical Antennas (+45º, +45º, +45º,
+45º, -45º, -45º, -45º, -45º)
0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 8T2P_00001111
0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1 8T2P_00110011
0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1 8T2P_01010101
0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3 8T4P_00112233
0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3 8T4P_01230123
When the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter is set to 8TnP_abcdefgh, CRS ports a to h are mapped
onto TX channels 1 to 8. If abcdefgh contains duplicate digits, the corresponding CRS port
signal is sent from multiple TX channels. The default value of this parameter is NOT_CFG.
For 8T4P and 8T2P cells, it is recommended that the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter be set to its
default value NOT_CFG for both wide-beam and non-wide-beam antennas.
4.4 CRS Port Mapping Detection and Reconfiguration

(FDD)
4.4.1 Principles
4.4.1.1 Detection and Reconfiguration

CRS port mapping detection involves the identification of no-spacing antenna combinations
and co-polarization antenna combinations, which are illustrated in Figure 4-6 and described
as follows:
l A no-spacing antenna combination consists of antennas with no spacing between them.

For example, antennas A and B form a no-spacing antenna combination; antennas C and
D form another.

eRAN
l A co-polarization antenna combination consists of antennas with the same polarization

direction. For example, antennas A and C form a co-polarization antenna combination;
antennas B and D form another.
Figure 4-6 Physical antennas
The Cell.CrsPortMap parameter setting may not be the optimum. The optimal mapping
principles are:
l The antennas for CRS ports 0 and 2 form a no-spacing antenna combination. The
antennas for CRS ports 1 and 3 form another.
l The antennas for CRS ports 0 and 1 form a co-polarization antenna combination. The
antennas for CRS ports 2 and 3 form another.
Huawei eNodeBs support CRS port mapping detection and reconfiguration. This function is
controlled by the GlobalProcSwitch.AutoRecfgSwitch parameter.
l If this switch is on, the eNodeB operates based on whether CRS port mapping detection
is successful. The detection result can be queried using the DSP CRSPORTOPTDET
command.
– If successful (that is, CRS Antenna Port Opt Mapping Detection Result is
COMPLETE) and the current Cell.CrsPortMap parameter setting is not the
optimum, the eNodeB automatically reconfigures this parameter.
– If unsuccessful (that is, CRS Antenna Port Opt Mapping Detection Result is not
COMPLETE), the eNodeB does not perform any processing.
l If this switch is off, the eNodeB checks the Cell.CrsPortMap parameter setting and
detects the optimal mapping but does not reconfigure this parameter.
– The method of detecting no-spacing antenna combinations is controlled by the
GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetectMethod parameter.
n If this parameter is set to CORRELATION, the eNodeB detects no-spacing
antenna combinations based on the differences in RX signal correlation
between antennas. This process requires the adjustment of antenna downtilt
angles.
n If this parameter is set to ISOLATION, the eNodeB detects no-spacing
antenna combinations based on the differences in isolation between antennas.
This process does not require the adjustment of antenna downtilt angles.
– During the detection, the eNodeB identifies co-polarization antenna combinations
by selecting UEs in a cell for channel estimation and calculating the correlation
between channels. The number of UEs selected per cell per hour is specified by the
GlobalProcSwitch.CrsAntPortOptDetUserNum parameter.
n Selecting a larger number of UEs will result in more accurate detection results
because there are more samples for channel estimation. However, it may affect
resource allocation in the cell.

eRAN
n Selecting a smaller number of UEs will have a smaller impact on resource

allocation in the cell. However, it may affect the accuracy of detection results
because there are fewer samples for channel estimation.
4.4.1.2 Example
The connections between antennas and RRUs are shown in Figure 4-7. The initial
configuration is presented in the left part of the figure. The Cell.CrsPortMap parameter is set
to 4T4P_0321 and the mapping between CRS ports and TX channels is . The
antennas for CRS ports 0 and 2 form a co-polarization antenna combination, and the antennas
for CRS ports 1 and 3 form another. However, the two combinations should be no-spacing
antenna combinations to ensure transmit diversity gains.
The optimal setting obtained after CRS port mapping detection is 4T4P_0213 and the
mapping between CRS ports and TX channels is , as shown in the right part of the
figure.
Figure 4-7 CRS port mapping reconfiguration
4.4.2.1 Benefits
The CRS port mapping detection and reconfiguration function allows operators to adjust
related parameters to adapt to different physical connections without conducting onsite
operations.
The expected detection completion rate is 90%. There may be no detection results after
multiple detections. It is recommended that the electrical downtilt angles of antennas be
configured for cells. Physical connections between antennas and RF modules are detected

eRAN
based on RX signal strength changes on each antenna at different downtilt angles and
correlation between uplink channels of the UE. RX signal strength and uplink channel
correlation are affected by many factors, for example, antenna downtilt angles, propagation
paths, and external interference.
Therefore, there may be no results after a detection. In this case, multiple detections are
required. If there are still no results after multiple detections, onsite operations are required
because the ambient environments are too complex. When no UEs are in a cell or UEs are at
the cell edge, drive-test UEs can be used for detection in the cell center. Direct these UEs to
the antennas and move them within the range of 50 m to 100 m. During this process, ensure
that the UEs are in RRC_CONNECTED mode.
The detection result error rate does not exceed 1% if detections are successfully completed.
The User Downlink Average Throughput increases by 1% to 5% in cells where the actual
CRS port mapping is changed to the optimal mapping.
4.4.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
If the GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetectMethod parameter is set to CORRELATION, the
downtilt angles of antennas require adjustment during detection and the basic network KPIs
of LTE will deteriorate by 30%.
If the GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetectMethod parameter is set to ISOLATION, the

downtilt angles of antennas do not require adjustment during detection and the network will
not be affected.
If the antenna system is shared by GSM, UMTS, and LTE, adjusting the downtilt angles of
antennas will affect the network KPIs of GSM and UMTS.
Function Impacts
None
4.4.3 Requirements
4.4.3.1 Licenses
None
4.4.3.2 Software
None

eRAN

Function Name Function Switch Reference
Virtual 4T4R Virtual4T4RSwitch option Virtual 4T4R (FDD)

of the
CellAlgoSwitch.EmimoSwitc
h parameter
Downlink extended CP Cell.DlCyclicPrefix Extended CP
Uplink extended CP Cell.UlCyclicPrefix Extended CP
Multi-sector cell Cell.MultiRruCellFlag Cell Management
NB-IoT cell None NB-IoT Radio and

Performance Basics
(FDD)
4.4.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

3900 and 5900 series base stations are compatible with this function.
Boards
4T4R BBPs can be used, for example, LBBPd2, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, or UBBPd5.
RF Modules
4T4R RF modules or 2T4R RF modules combined for 4T4R can be used.
2T2R RF modules can be used only when certain conditions are met. To find out whether a
2T2R RF module can be used, perform the following steps:
1. Run the DSP CELLPHYTOPO command to obtain the cabinet, subrack, and slot
numbers of an RF module.
2. Run the DSP BRDMFRINFO command and check the Description field.
If the field value is V3, V6, or KUNLUN, the RF module supports this function.
The active antenna unit (AAU) does not support this function.
Cells
Cells must be served by integrated 4T4R RF modules or RF modules combined for 4T4R.
The following cells are not supported:
l 2T2R cells
l 8T8R cells
l SFN cells
l Cells generated by dividing signals of an RRU and directing them to multiple antennas

eRAN
This function is not suitable for scenarios with software-defined antennas, vertically stacked
antennas, or 4T6S.
If the GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetectMethod parameter is set to CORRELATION, CRS
port detection and reconfiguration can be performed in cells that meet the following
conditions:
l The cell bandwidth is 5 MHz or higher, and integrated 4T4R antennas are used.
l The antennas support remote electrical tilt (RET) control, and the RRU ports that support
RET control are correctly connected to the antenna ports.
l In separate-MPT scenarios, the RET antennas are configured on the LTE side so that
downtilt angles can be automatically adjusted and CRS ports can be reconfigured.
If the GlobalProcSwitch.ColumnDetectMethod parameter is set to ISOLATION, CRS port
detection and reconfiguration can be performed in cells with a bandwidth of 5 MHz or higher
and with integrated 4T4R antennas.
4.4.3.4 Others
None


Automatic Reconfigure GlobalProcSwitch.AutoRe For detection, turn off this

Switch cfgSwitch switch.
For reconfiguration, turn on this
switch.
CRS Ant Port Opt GlobalProcSwitch.CrsAnt For drive tests in new cells, you
Mapping Detection User PortOptDetUserNum are advised to set this parameter
Number to the maximum value.
On commercial networks, set
this parameter to its
recommended value.

eRAN
Column Detect Method GlobalProcSwitch.Colum The value CORRELATION is

nDetectMethod recommended for detecting no-
spacing antenna combinations.
l If the method indicated by
the value CORRELATION
is not supported or the
detection fails, the method
indicated by the value
ISOLATION can be used.
l If the method indicated by
the value CORRELATION
provides detection results,
the method indicated by the
value ISOLATION is not
required.
Activation Command Examples

//Starting detection
STR CRSPORTOPTDET:
AutoRecfgSwitch=OFF,CrsAntPortOptDetUserNum=3,ColumnDetectMethod=ISOLATION;
//Starting reconfiguration after the detection, which will lead to an automatic

cell reset
STR CRSPORTOPTDET: AutoRecfgSwitch=ON;
Optimization Command Examples

The antennas support RET control, and the RRU ports that support RET control are correctly
connected to the antenna ports. The following provides an example for setting an antenna
device number.
//Querying the device number of the RET antenna used by the LTE cell
LST RET;
//Querying the cabinet, subrack, and slot numbers of the RRU of the LTE cell
LST RRU;
//Binding the RET antenna to the RRU

//For an RRU (RRU 60) that does not share the antenna system with others
MOD RETSUBUNIT:DEVICENO=0,SUBUNITNO=1,CONNCN1=0,CONNSRN1=60,CONNSN1=0,CONNPN1=R0A;
//For two 4T4R RRUs (RRUs 60 and 61) that share the same antenna system
MOD
RETSUBUNIT:DEVICENO=0,SUBUNITNO=1,CONNCN1=0,CONNSRN1=60,CONNSN1=0,CONNPN1=R0A,CONN
CN2=0,CONNSRN2=61,CONNSN2=0,CONNPN2=R0A;

eRAN
Step 1 Run the DSP CRSPORTOPTDET command to query the status of CRS port mapping
detection and reconfiguration.
Step 2 Check the output items listed in Table 4-10.
----End
Table 4-10 Output of CRS port mapping detection and reconfiguration

Field Description
CRS Antenna Port Opt Mapping Indicates the result of CRS port mapping
Detection Result detection for optimization.
Current CRS Antenna Port Mapping Indicates the current mapping between CRS
ports and RRU channels.
Optimal CRS Antenna Port Mapping Indicates the optimal mapping between CRS
ports and RRU channels.
CRS Opt Det Completion Status Indicates the CRS detection completion status
of the entire base station.
CRS Optimization Detection Progress(%) Indicates the CRS detection progress of the
entire base station.
Table 4-11 explains the values of CRS Antenna Port Opt Mapping Detection Result.
Table 4-11 Detection result values

Field Name Parameter ID Field Value Meaning
CRS Antenna GlobalProcSw N/A No detection

Port Opt itch.CrsAntPor
Mapping tOptDetResult RUNNING Detecting
Detection Result FAILURE Detection failed
COMPLETE Detection completed
SCENARIO_NOT_SUPP Scenario not supported

ORTED
FAILURE_HIGHER_PRI Detection failed: a

ORITY_TASK_DISRUP higher-priority task
TION disrupted the detection
FAILURE_TIMEOUT Detection failed:

timeout

eRAN
Network Monitoring
l Detection completion rate = Number of COMPLETE cells / (Number of COMPLETE
cells + Number of FAILURE cells + Number of FAILURE_TIMEOUT cells)
In this formula, the numbers of COMPLETE, FAILURE, and FAILURE_TIMEOUT
cells are obtained from the CRS Antenna Port Opt Mapping Detection Result.
l Detection result error rate = Number of cells where the detected connections are
inconsistent with the actual connections / Total number of monitored cells
Spot checks on site can be performed to determine whether the detected connections are
consistent with the actual connections.
l User Downlink Average Throughput
4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO
4.5.1 Principles
Downlink 2x2 MIMO can be used only in cells configured with at least two CRS ports, and
only for 2R UEs (UEs with two RX channels).
Table 4-12 lists the parameters used for this feature.
Table 4-12 Parameter used for downlink 2x2 MIMO
CRS Port Number Cell.CrsPortNum Set this parameter to

CRS_PORT_2.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxM Set this parameter to

MIMO layers imoRankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2.
MIMO Adaptive Switch CellMimoParaCfg.M The value NO_ADAPTIVE is

imoAdaptiveSwitch recommended generally.
The value CL_ADAPTIVE is
recommended if the benefits of
closed-loop adaptation have been
verified.
Fixed MIMO Mode CellMimoParaCfg.Fi Set this parameter to TM3.

xedMimoMode
4.5.2.1 Benefits
Table 4-13 describes the improvements provided by downlink 2x2 MIMO over downlink
single-input single-output (SISO).

eRAN
Table 4-13 Improvements provided by downlink 2x2 MIMO

Improvement Description
Increases downlink peak throughput by A single UE far away from the cell center
approximately 100%. will experience high gains.
Increases downlink edge throughput. An entire cell that accommodates many

UEs far away from the cell center will
experience high gains.
Improves downlink cell coverage. None
The performance of this feature cannot be ensured in closed-loop transmission mode if RRUs
are combined for use or the "RRU Channel Cross Connection Under MIMO" feature is used.
Downlink 2x2 MIMO requires that TX channels be connected to physical antennas in
different polarization directions. Otherwise, the gains may be reduced.
4.5.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
None
4.5.3 Requirements
4.5.3.1 Licenses
RAT Feature ID Feature Name Model Sales Unit
FDD LOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO LT1S0D2I2O00 Per Cell
TDD TDLOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO LT1STD2I2O00 Per Cell
In addition to feature licenses, capacity licenses are required for MIMO. Each BBP is licensed
by default to provide two baseband TX channels and two baseband RX channels for each cell.
Each RF module is licensed by default to provide two RF TX channels and two RF RX
channels. For details, see License Control Item Lists (FDD) or License Control Item Lists
(TDD).
4.5.3.2 Software
None

eRAN

None
4.5.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

No requirements
Boards
No requirements
RF Modules
No requirements
4.5.3.4 Others
UEs must support 2R.

Uplink MIMO and downlink MIMO are configured together in actual applications. Therefore,
both uplink and downlink parameters are listed here while other parameters for cell setup are
not. Table 4-14 describes the parameters used for activation using the setup of a 2T2R cell as
an example.
Cell transmission and Cell.TxRxMode Set this parameter to 2T2R.

reception mode

CRS_PORT_2.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxMimo Set this parameter to

MIMO layers RankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2.

eRAN
4.5.4.1.2 Using MML Commands (FDD)

Set up a 2T2R cell.
//Adding a sector and a set of sector equipment after adding an RRU
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, ANTNUM=2, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A,
ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, CREATESECTOREQM=TRUE, SECTOREQMID=0;
ADD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=0, SECTORID=0, ANTCFGMODE=ANTENNAPORT, ANTNUM=2,
ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANTTYPE1=RXTX_MODE, ANT2CN=0,
ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANTTYPE2=RXTX_MODE;
//Adding an FDD cell

ADD CELL: LocalCellId=0, CellName="cell0", FreqBand=12, UlEarfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
DlEarfcn=5020, UlBandWidth=CELL_BW_N50, DlBandWidth=CELL_BW_N50, CellId=0,
PhyCellId=0, FddTddInd=CELL_FDD, RootSequenceIdx=0,
CustomizedBandWidthCfgInd=NOT_CFG, EmergencyAreaIdCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
UePowerMaxCfgInd=NOT_CFG, MultiRruCellFlag=BOOLEAN_FALSE,
TxRxMode=2T2R,CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_2;
//Adding cell sector equipment

ADD EUCELLSECTOREQM: LocalCellId=0, SectorEqmId=0;
//Adding an operator for the cell

ADD CELLOP: LocalCellId=0, TrackingAreaId=0;
//Setting the maximum number of MIMO layers

MOD CELLDLSCHALGO: LocalCellId=0, MaxMimoRankPara=SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2;
//Activating cell 0
ACT CELL: LocalCellId=0;

N/A
4.5.4.1.3 Using MML Commands (TDD)

Set up a 2T2R cell.
//Adding a 20 MHz TDD cell

ADD CELL: LocalCellId=0, CellName="CELL1", FreqBand=38, UlEarfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
PhyCellId=0, FddTddInd=CELL_TDD, SubframeAssignment=SA2,
SpecialSubframePatterns=SSP7, EuCellStandbyMode=ACTIVE, RootSequenceIdx=0,
UePowerMaxCfgInd=NOT_CFG, TxRxMode=2T2R,CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_2;



//Activating cell 0

eRAN

N/A

Use the counters listed in Table 4-15 to monitor downlink MIMO with transmission modes
adaptively configured. If any counter has a non-zero value, downlink 2x2 MIMO has taken
effect.
Table 4-15 Counters used to monitor downlink MIMO with transmission modes adaptively
configured
Counter ID Counter Name Counter Description Corresponding
Feature
1526727391 L.ChMeas.MIMO.PR Total number of physical DL 2x2 MIMO

B.CL.Rank1 resource blocks (PRBs) DL 4x2 MIMO
used for rank 1
transmission in downlink DL 4x4 MIMO
closed-loop MIMO
1526727392 L.ChMeas.MIMO.PR Total number of PRBs used

B.CL.Rank2 for rank 2 transmission in
downlink closed-loop
MIMO

B.OL.Rank1 for rank 1 transmission in
downlink open-loop MIMO

Network Monitoring
None
4.6 DL 4x2 MIMO (FDD)
4.6.1 Principles
Downlink 4x2 MIMO can be used only in a cell configured with at least four CRS ports and
only for 2R UEs.

eRAN

CRS_PORT_4.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxMimoR Set this parameter to

MIMO layers ankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2.
MIMO Adaptive Switch CellMimoParaCfg.MimoA Set this parameter to

daptiveSwitch CL_ADAPTIVE.
4.6.2.1 Benefits
Table 4-17 describes the benefits offered by downlink 4x2 MIMO.
Table 4-17 Benefits offered by downlink 4x2 MIMO
Improvement over Downlink 2x2 MIMO Description
Decreases the peak throughput by no more None

than 2.3%.
Increases the Cell Downlink Average For a single UE, the farther away it is
Throughput by up to 15%. from the cell center, the higher the gains
are.
Increases the downlink edge throughput by
10% to 40%. For a cell, the more cell-edge users
(CEUs) it accommodates, the higher the
gains are.
Improves the downlink cell coverage. None
Downlink 4x2 MIMO requires that the feeders between physical antennas and RRUs be of the
same type, the feeders be shorter than 75 m, and the difference in length between the feeders
be less than 1 m.
4.6.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None

eRAN
Feature Impacts
None
4.6.3 Requirements
4.6.3.1 Licenses
Feature ID Feature Name Model Sales Unit
LOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna LT1S0U4ARD00 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
LOFD-001003 DL 4x2 MIMO LT1S0D4I2O00 Per Cell
channels. For details, see License Control Item Lists (FDD).
4.6.3.2 Software
None

None
4.6.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

This function requires 3900 or 5900 series base stations.
Boards
This function requires 4T4R BBPs.
RF Modules
No requirements
4.6.3.4 Networking
The networking requirements for downlink 4x2 MIMO are the same as those for downlink
4x4 MIMO. For details, see 4.7.3.4 Networking (FDD).

eRAN
4.6.3.5 Others
To achieve stable benefits from closed-loop MIMO, it is recommended that RRU ports and
antenna ports be connected using jumpers (and feeders) with the same length, regardless of
whether integrated or combined RRUs are used. If one or more jumpers (and feeders) are
connected to a combiner, it is required that the difference in delay between channels induced
by the combiner and jumpers (and feeders) meet the requirements in Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 Requirements for inter-channel delay difference
System Bandwidth Requirements for Inter-Channel Delay

Difference
20 MHz Less than 10 ns
15 MHz Less than 13.3 ns
≤ 3 MHz Less than 65 ns
If the inter-channel delay difference does not meet the preceding requirements, there will be a
significant deterioration in the performance of downlink 4x2 MIMO in closed-loop mode.
The larger the delay difference, the higher the degree of deterioration. Assume that the
bandwidth is 10 MHz and inter-channel delay difference is introduced at ports D and B. Then,
the delay difference affects performance, as listed in Table 4-19.
Table 4-19 Impact of inter-channel delay difference on performance
Inter-Channel Average Average Proportion of Throughput

Delay Throughput SINR (dB) Rank 2 Change
Difference (Mbit/s) Transmission
s
4x2 MIMO 29.78 11.41 70.87% -

(baseline)
4x2 MIMO 29.78 11.22 69.64% Remains

+ 10 ns unchanged
4x2 MIMO 28.59 11.06 61.31% -4.00%

+ 20 ns
4x2 MIMO 23.75 11.21 34.86% -20.25%

+ 30 ns
4x2 MIMO 22.37 11.34 33.96% -24.88%

+ 50 ns

eRAN
The preceding test results are reference only for estimating the impact of inter-channel delay
difference on 4T performance. The results will change with test conditions.
If combiners are required in engineering, note the following:
l It is recommended that other channels be connected to the same types of combiners to
ensure that the inter-channel delay difference meets the requirements in the preceding
table. However, this solution increases component costs and engineering costs.
l If other channels are not connected to combiners, you need to measure the delay induced
by the existing combiner, estimate the delay difference caused by the difference between
jumpers (and feeders), and use MML commands to provide delay compensation for other
channels. This solution requires a vector network analyzer (VNA) for combiner delay
measurement.

In actual applications, uplink MIMO and downlink MIMO are configured together. Therefore,
both uplink and downlink parameters are listed here while other cell-setup parameters are not.
Table 4-20 describes the parameters used for activation using the setup of a 4T4R cell as an
example.

Parameter Parameter ID Option Setting Notes
Name
Cell transmission Cell.TxRxMode N/A Set this parameter to

and reception 4T4R.
mode
CRS Port Cell.CrsPortNum N/A Set this parameter to

Number CRS_PORT_4.
CRS Antenna Cell.CrsPortMap N/A Set this parameter to

Port Mapping 4T4P_0321.
Maximum CellDlschAlgo.Ma N/A Set this parameter to

number of xMimoRankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK
MIMO layers _2.
Compatibility ENodeBAlgoSwitc Tm3Tm4Max4La Select this option.

Control Switch h.CompatibilityCtrl yerCtrlSwitch
Switch

eRAN

Change 2T2R and 2T4R cells to 4T4R cells.
l Changing a 2T2R cell to a 4T4R cell

//Deactivating cell 0
DEA CELL: LocalCellId=0;
//Modifying sector and sector equipment configurations

MOD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, OPMODE=ADD, ANTNUM=2, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0,
ANT1N=R0C, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0D;
MOD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=0, OPMODE=ADD, ANTNUM=2, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60,
ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0C, ANTTYPE1=RXTX_MODE, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0,
ANT2N=R0D, ANTTYPE2=RXTX_MODE;
//Changing the number of CRS ports and CRS port mapping. This is a high-risk
operation and you are advised to use the following parameter settings when
setting up the cell.
MOD CELL: LocalCellId=0, CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_4, TxRxMode=4T4R,
CrsPortMap=4T4P_0321;

MOD CELLDLSCHALGO: LocalCellId=0,MaxMimoRankPara=SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2;
//Enabling MIMO at a maximum of four layers for UEs of categories 6 or higher

(not category 5)
MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: COMPATIBILITYCTRLSWITCH=Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch-1;
//Activating cell 0


MOD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=0, OPMODE=DELETE, ANTNUM=2, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60,
ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0C, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0D;


(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0

//Turning on switches related to CQI reporting optimization
MOD CELLCQIADAPTIVECFG: LocalCellId=x, CqiPeriodAdaptive=ON,
HoAperiodicCqiCfgSwitch=ON,SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch=ON;
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0, DlSchSwitch=AperiodicCqiTrigOptSwitch-1;

eRAN
//Turning on the ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch

MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: CompatibilityCtrlSwitch=ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch-1;

adaptively configured. If any counter has a non-zero value, downlink 4x2 MIMO has taken
effect.
configured
Feature

used for rank 1
closed-loop MIMO

MIMO


Network Monitoring
None
4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO
4.7.1 Principles
Downlink 4x4 MIMO can be used only in cells configured with at least four CRS ports, and
only for 4R UEs.

eRAN


CRS_PORT_4.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxMimoR Set this parameter to

MIMO layers ankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_4.
MIMO Adaptive Switch CellMimoParaCfg.MimoA Set this parameter to

daptiveSwitch CL_ADAPTIVE.
Downlink 4x4 MIMO supports scheduling of a maximum of four layers. If the UE category is
6 or higher (excluding 8 and 14), the maximum number of layers in TM3 or TM4 is
controlled by the Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch option of the
ENodeBAlgoSwitch.CompatibilityCtrlSwitch parameter:
l If this option is selected, a maximum of four layers can be scheduled (that is, ranks 1 to 4
are supported).
l If this option is deselected, a maximum of two layers can be scheduled (that is, ranks 1
and 2 are supported).
4.7.2.1 Benefits
Downlink 4x4 MIMO increases the downlink peak throughput by approximately 100%
compared with downlink 2x2 MIMO. Table 4-23 describes the other improvements over
downlink 2x2 MIMO.
Table 4-23 Benefits offered by downlink 4x4 MIMO

Transmission Average Downlink Edge Description
Mode Downlink Throughput
Throughput
Open-loop Increases by 20% Increases by 30% A single UE far away from

to 60%. to 70%. the cell center will
experience high gains.
Closed-loop Increases by 50% Increases by 50%
to 90%. to 120% An entire cell that
accommodates many UEs
far away from the cell
center will experience high
gains.

eRAN
NOTE
Downlink closed-loop 4x4 MIMO depends on UE-reported ranks and precoding matrix indications
(PMIs) for scheduling and precoding. The benefits offered by this function are affected if the reported
information is inaccurate or the PMIs reported by UEs in movement cannot match channel changes
promptly.
Downlink 4x4 MIMO requires that the feeders between physical antennas and RRUs be of the
same type, the feeders be shorter than 75 m, and the difference in length between the feeders
be less than 1 m.
4.7.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
For TDD, the proportion of UEs in closed-loop mode and the cell throughput will increase
and the service drop rate will decrease after eRAN TDD 11.1 is upgraded to a later version.
For FDD, there is no impact.
Function Impacts
RAT Function Function Reference Description
Name Switch
TDD Inter-cell InterCellDmi D-MIMO Joint transmission cannot

downlink D- moJTSwitch (TDD) be performed for UEs in
MIMO option of the TM3 or TM4.
CellAlgoSwitc
h.DMIMOAlgo
Switch
parameter
FDD DL 256QAM Dl256QamSwit Modulation A UE that supports both

TDD ch option of the Schemes downlink 4x4 MIMO and
CellAlgoSwitc 256QAM may not meet
h.Dl256QamAl the requirements for
goSwitch 256QAM after entering
parameter 4x4 MIMO mode. As a
result, 256QAM may
offer lower or even no
gains.
4.7.3 Requirements

eRAN
4.7.3.1 Licenses
RAT Feature Feature Name Model Sales Unit
ID

003
FDD LOFD-001 DL 4x4 MIMO LT1S0DMIMO00 Per Cell

060
TDD TDLOFD- DL 2x2 MIMO LT1STD2I2O00 Per Cell

001001
TDD TDLOFD- DL 4x4 MIMO LT1STD4I4O00 Per Cell

001060
(TDD).
4.7.3.2 Software
None

RAT Function Function Switch Reference
Name
TDD Massive N/A Massive MIMO (TDD)

MIMO cell
TDD TM9 TM9Switch option of the Beamforming (TDD)

CellAlgoSwitch.EnhMIMOSwitch
parameter
TDD Intra- None Soft Split Resource

frequency split Duplex (TDD)
FDD None N/A N/A
4.7.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models


eRAN
Boards
This function requires 4T BBPs. In TDD, the LBBPc does not support this function.
RF Modules
No requirements
4.7.3.4 Networking (FDD)

In FDD, adjust antennas for 4T4R in the following scenarios:
l Reducing the antenna installation space
Replace the original separated antennas with an integrated antenna, as shown in Figure
4-8. When using an integrated antenna for cells 1 and 2 in state 1, adjust the downtilt
angles and azimuths, making them consistent between the cells.
Figure 4-8 Reconstruction for reducing the antenna installation space
l Utilizing the original antennas

When only two antenna ports are assigned to the original cells, use two more antenna
ports for the new 4T4R cell, as shown in Figure 4-9.
Note the following regarding state 3:
– Case 1 (each 2T2R cell is changed to a 4T4R cell)
Adjust the antenna downtilt angles of at least one cell. The downtilt angles must be
consistent between the two cells so that the signals of all antennas can be combined.
– Case 2 (cell 2 is changed from 2T4R to 4T4R)
Adjust the antenna downtilt angles of cell 2 to the same direction so that the 4T
effects can be ensured.

eRAN
Figure 4-9 Reconstruction for utilizing the original antennas
The differences in gains when moving between the different states in Figure 4-8 and Figure
4-9 are as follows:
l From state 1 to state 2, there may be no gains or even performance loss during the
adjustment of downtilt angles and azimuths.
To achieve an overall improvement on 2T2R, ensure that the basic performance does not
deteriorate during the adjustment.
l From state 2 to state 3, there will be gains after 4T4R is deployed.
4.7.3.5 Networking (TDD)

In TDD 4T or 8T scenarios, the RSRP decreases by 3 dB after the number of CRS ports
changes from 2 to 4. If the transmit power is not increased, some KPIs may deteriorate,
including:
l Measurement reporting rate

l Number of UEs in 4P cells (cells with four CRS ports)
l Service drop rate
l Proportion of RRC connection reestablishments
l Handover success rates
l Uplink and downlink bit errors
l Number of handovers
l Proportion of transmissions in TM2
l Proportion of beamforming
To avoid such deterioration after the reconstruction, the following networking solutions can
be used:

eRAN
l If an RRU has remaining transmit power, then:

– Allocate 3 dB from the remaining transmit power to the 4P cell.
– If the RRU transmit power of the LTE cell after the allocation of 3 dB exceeds the
maximum power allowed by local rules and regulations, you are advised to use the
solution to the case when an RRU has no remaining power.
NOTE
RRU transmit power is restricted in some countries and regions. For example, the RRU transmit power
specification is 80 w, but only 40 w is allowed by local rules and regulations. If the remaining transmit
power is allocated to the 4P cell, the total transmit power of the RRU will exceed 40 w though the
coverage will not shrink after the reconstruction. In such a case, you are advised to use the solution to
the case when an RRU has no remaining power.
l If an RRU has no remaining power, it is not recommended that downlink 4x4 MIMO be
enabled. If it is enabled, there will be negative impacts.
4.7.3.6 Others
To achieve stable benefits from closed-loop MIMO, it is recommended that RRU ports and
antenna ports be connected using jumpers (and feeders) with the same length, regardless of
whether integrated or combined RRUs are used. If one or more jumpers (and feeders) are
connected to a combiner, it is required that the difference in delay between channels induced
by the combiner and jumpers (and feeders) meet the requirements in Table 4-24.
Table 4-24 Requirements for inter-channel delay difference

System Bandwidth Requirements for Inter-Channel Delay
Difference
15 MHz Less than 13.3 ns
≤ 3 MHz Less than 65 ns
If the inter-channel delay difference does not meet the preceding requirements, there will be a
significant deterioration in the performance of downlink 4x4 MIMO in closed-loop mode.
The larger the delay difference, the higher the degree of deterioration. Assume that the
bandwidth is 10 MHz and inter-channel delay difference is introduced at ports D and B. Then,
the delay difference affects performance as listed in Table 4-25.

eRAN
Table 4-25 Impact of inter-channel delay difference on performance

Inter-Channel Average Average Proportion of Throughput
Delay Throughput SINR (dB) Rank 2 Change
Difference (Mbit/s) Transmission
s
4x4 MIMO 29.78 11.41 70.87% -

(baseline)
4x4 MIMO 29.78 11.22 69.64% Remains

+ 10 ns unchanged
4x4 MIMO 28.59 11.06 61.31% -4.00%

+ 20 ns
4x4 MIMO 23.75 11.21 34.86% -20.25%

+ 30 ns
4x4 MIMO 22.37 11.34 33.96% -24.88%

+ 50 ns
The preceding test results are reference only for estimating the impact of inter-channel delay
difference on 4T performance. The results will change with test conditions.
If combiners are required in engineering, note the following:
l It is recommended that other channels be connected to the same types of combiners to
ensure that the inter-channel delay difference meets the requirements in the preceding
table. However, this solution increases component costs and engineering costs.
l If other channels are not connected to combiners, you need to measure the delay induced
by the existing combiner, estimate the delay difference caused by the difference between
jumpers (and feeders), and use MML commands to provide delay compensation for other
channels. This solution requires a VNA for combiner delay measurement.

example.

eRAN

Name

and reception 4T4R.
mode
CRS Port Cell.CrsPortNum N/A Set this parameter to

Number CRS_PORT_4.

Port Mapping NOT_CFG.
Maximum CellDlschAlgo.Ma N/A Set this parameter to

MIMO layers _4.
Compatibility ENodeBAlgoSwitc Tm3Tm4Max4La Select this option.

Control Switch h.CompatibilityCtrl yerCtrlSwitch
Switch




(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0


eRAN



(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0


Set up a 4T4R cell.
//Adding a sector after adding an RRU
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, SECNAME="0", LOCATIONNAME="0", USERLABEL="0", ANTNUM=4,
ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0,
ANT2N=R0B, ANT3CN=0, ANT3SRN=60, ANT3SN=0, ANT3N=R0C, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=60,
ANT4SN=0, ANT4N=R0D, CREATESECTOREQM=TRUE, SECTOREQMID=0;

ADD CELL:LocalCellId=0, CellName="CELL1", FreqBand=38, UlEarfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
UePowerMaxCfgInd=NOT_CFG, TxRxMode=4T4R, CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_4,
CrsPortMap=NOT_CFG;




(excluding categories 8 and 14)
//Activating cell 0

eRAN

N/A

adaptively configured. If any counter related to rank 3 or 4 has a non-zero value, downlink
4x4 MIMO has taken effect.
configured

Feature

used for rank 1
closed-loop MIMO

MIMO


1526728174 L.ChMeas.MIMO.PR Total number of PRBs used DL 4x4 MIMO

MIMO

MIMO


eRAN

Feature

Network Monitoring
None
4.8 TX Channel Calibration

If the delay between TX signals increases, the performance of closed-loop MIMO
deteriorates. If two RRUs are combined to serve a cell, TX channel calibration must be used
to align the TX channels of the RRUs.
TX channel calibration does not require the hardware modification of RRUs and physical
antennas but requires software upgrade. It depends on the coupling of air interface signals
between physical antennas. In addition, it has the following requirements:
l RRU: Combined 2T2R RRUs or 2T4R RRUs (FDD) work in the same frequency band
and connect to the same BBP. In the current version, TX channel calibration can be used
on combined RRU3942 modules.
l BBP: The BBP must be LBBPd, UBBPd, or UBBPe.
l Physical antenna: An integrated antenna with four ports is recommended. Two physical
antennas each with two ports can also be used, with a horizontal spacing of not greater
than 5 m. Physical antennas cannot be installed vertically.
l Cell: The cell is a 4T4R cell, and the Cell.MultiRruCellFlag parameter is set to
BOOLEAN_FALSE. The cell cannot be a 2T2R, 2T4R, or multi-RRU cell.
l Networking mode: RRU channels and physical antennas are connected in non-cross-
connection mode, as shown in Figure 4-10. CPRI ports can use the star or cascaded
topology.
NOTE
TX channel calibration cannot be used on combined 1T2R RRUs. Therefore, open-loop 2x2 MIMO is
recommended but closed-loop 2x2 MIMO is not recommended on commercial networks.

eRAN
Figure 4-10 Example of topology for TX channel calibration
TX channel calibration is controlled by the RruJointCalParaCfg.TxChnCalSwitch

parameter:
l If this parameter is set to OFF:
TX channel calibration is disabled, and the throughput of closed-loop 4x2 or 4x4 MIMO
cannot be ensured.
l If this parameter is set to ON:
The first TX channel calibration starts after a cell is set up. Subsequent TX channel
calibration is performed periodically. The throughput of closed-loop 4x2 or 4x4 MIMO
increases by up to 30%. During the calibration (lasting for less than 1s), the downlink
throughput slightly decreases (by less than 5%) and the uplink throughput of cell edge
users (CEUs) also decreases.
The RruJointCalParaCfg.TxChnCalTime and RruJointCalParaCfg.TxChnCalPeriod
parameters specify the local time and period of TX channel calibration, respectively.
The DSP CELLCALIBRATION command can be used to query the calibration time, type,
and effect of the last 10 TX channel calibrations.

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 5 Uplink MIMO
5 Uplink MIMO
Uplink MIMO is a multiple-antenna reception technology of the eNodeB. It is used to provide

the following solutions: receive diversity, multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO), and single-user
MIMO (SU-MIMO).
Figure 5-1 illustrates these solutions using uplink 2-antenna reception as an example.
Figure 5-1 Uplink 2-antenna reception
5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
5.1.1 Principles
Uplink 2-antenna receive diversity requires a cell to have at least two RX channels. The two
RX channels receive the same signal of a UE from different directions to improve reception
quality.
Uplink 2-antenna receive diversity can be deployed in 1T2R or 2T2R cells. The numbers of
TX and RX channels provided by the hardware must be greater than or equal to the numbers
of TX and RX channels in the cell. The TX/RX mode of a cell is specified by the
Cell.TxRxMode parameter.

eRAN
5.1.1.1 1T2R Cell

A 1T2R cell is set up on a 1T2R sector. A 1T2R sector can be served by a 1T2R RRU. This
RRU is connected to the baseband unit (BBU) through optical fibers and to the physical
antenna through feeders, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 1T2R sector deployment
A 1T2R sector can also be served by a 2T2R or higher-order RRU:

l If a 2T2R or higher-order RRU is used, the redundant TX or RX channels can be used
for other sectors.
l If a 2T4R or 4T4R RRU is used, the 1T2R sector can be set up only on channels A and C
or channels B and D.
5.1.1.2 2T2R Cell
Integrated RRU
A 2T2R cell is set up on a 2T2R sector. A 2T2R sector can be served by a 2T2R RRU. Figure
5-3 illustrates the deployment.

eRAN
Figure 5-3 2T2R sector deployment (with an integrated RRU)
A 2T2R sector can also be served by a 2T4R or higher-order RRU:

l If a 2T4R or higher-order RRU is used, the redundant TX or RX channels can be used
for other sectors.
l If a 2T4R RRU is used, the 2T2R sector can be set up only on channels A and B.
l If a 4T4R RRU is used, it is recommended that the 2T2R sector be set up on channels A
and C, channels B and D, or channels A and B. All channels involved must work in
TX/RX mode.
Combined RRUs
A 2T2R sector can be served by two 1T2R RRUs. Figure 5-4 illustrates the deployment.

eRAN
Figure 5-4 2T2R sector deployment (with combined RRUs)
5.1.2.1 Benefits
Uplink 2-antenna receive diversity is a basic feature. Its benefits are not detailed here.
5.1.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
None
5.1.3 Requirements
5.1.3.1 Licenses
The TX/RX capabilities of cells depend on the TX/RX capabilities of baseband processing
units (BBPs). For the TX/RX capabilities of BBPs, see Hardware Description in product
documentation.
Each BBP is licensed by default to provide two baseband TX channels and two baseband RX
channels for each cell. Each RF module is licensed by default to provide two RF TX channels
and two RF RX channels. Therefore, 2T2R cell setup does not require additional licenses.

eRAN
5.1.3.2 Software
None

None
5.1.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

No requirements
Boards
No requirements
RF Modules
No requirements
5.1.3.4 Others
None

not. Table 5-1 describes the parameters used for activation using the setup of a 2T2R cell as
an example.


reception mode

CRS_PORT_2.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxMimo Set this parameter to

MIMO layers RankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2.

eRAN

Set up a 2T2R cell.
ADD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=0, SECTORID=0, ANTCFGMODE=ANTENNAPORT, ANTNUM=2,
ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANTTYPE1=RXTX_MODE, ANT2CN=0,
ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANTTYPE2=RXTX_MODE;
//Adding an FDD cell

ADD CELL: LocalCellId=0, CellName="cell0", FreqBand=12, UlEarfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
PhyCellId=0, FddTddInd=CELL_FDD, RootSequenceIdx=0,
UePowerMaxCfgInd=NOT_CFG, MultiRruCellFlag=BOOLEAN_FALSE,
TxRxMode=2T2R,CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_2;



//Activating cell 0

N/A

Set up a 2T2R cell.

ADD CELL: LocalCellId=0, CellName="CELL1", FreqBand=38, UlEarfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
UePowerMaxCfgInd=NOT_CFG, TxRxMode=2T2R,CrsPortNum=CRS_PORT_2;




eRAN
//Activating cell 0

N/A

Step 1 Start a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) monitoring task on the U2000 client to
monitor the RSSIs of antennas.
Item for Unit Value Range Description
Monitoring
Antenna y RSSI dBm -140 to -50 Antenna y RSSI in the

system bandwidth
Step 2 Check the monitoring results.

Feature Successful Result
UL 2-Antenna Receive Diversity The RSSIs of antennas 0 and 1 are not N/A.
UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity The RSSIs of antennas 0 to 3 are not N/A.

(TDD)
----End
Network Monitoring
Monitor the counters listed in Table 5-2 and calculate the uplink cell throughput. The more
the antennas for a cell, the higher the cell throughput, under the same conditions such as the
same cell, bandwidth, and total transmit power.
Table 5-2 Counters related to receive diversity

Counter ID Counter Name
1526728259 L.Thrp.bits.UL
1526728998 L.Thrp.Time.Cell.UL.HighPrecision

eRAN
Monitor the counters listed in Table 5-3 to check the status of connections between antennas
and RRU ports. If the average RSSI value of antenna x is much less than those of the other
antennas, antenna x is not connected to an RRU port. In Figure 5-5, antennas 2 and 3 are not
connected to RRU ports.
Table 5-3 Counters related to average RSSI values
1526737656 through L.CellSectorEQUIP.UL.RSSI.Avg.Ant0 through

1526737663 L.CellSectorEQUIP.UL.RSSI.Avg.Ant7
Figure 5-5 Example of average RSSI values
5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity
5.2.1 Principles
Uplink 4-antenna receive diversity requires that a cell have at least four RX channels. The
four RX channels receive the same signal of a UE from different directions to improve
reception quality.
Uplink 4-antenna receive diversity can be deployed in 2T4R or 4T4R cells. The numbers of
TX and RX channels provided by the hardware must be greater than or equal to the numbers
of TX and RX channels in the cell. The TX/RX mode of a cell is specified by the
Cell.TxRxMode parameter.
5.2.1.1 2T4R Cell (FDD)
Integrated RRU

eRAN
A 2T4R sector can also be served by a 4T4R RRU. It is recommended that channels A and B
work in TX/RX mode while channels C and D work in RX mode.
Combined RRUs
Figure 5-7 2T4R sector deployment (with combined 1T2R RRUs)

eRAN
A 2T4R sector can be served by two 2T2R RRUs. Figure 5-8 illustrates the deployment. In
this case, RRU 1 works in 2T2R mode and RRU 2 works in 0T2R mode. Compared with
1T2R+1T2R, this work mode can prevent downlink throughput from decreasing due to
inconsistent feeder lengths, losses, or other factors.
5.2.1.2 4T4R Cell
Integrated RRU

eRAN
Combined RRUs

eRAN
Split RRUs (TDD)

In TDD, a 4T4R sector can also be served by part of an 8T8R RRU. Four RRU ports and four
antenna ports are selected for setting up a 4T4R sector, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 RRU split

eRAN
For special requirements, the ports of an 8T8R RRU can be split into two groups of 4T4R
ports. Each group of 4T4R ports are connected to an 8T8R antenna to set up a 4T4R cell, as
shown in Figure 5-13.
l Preferentially select two pairs of cross-polarized antennas that are functional and not
adjacent to each other.
l Randomly select four functional RRU ports, and connect these ports (in ascending order
of sequence number) to the antennas.
l Connect the RRU's CAL calibration port and the antenna system's CAL calibration port.
Figure 5-13 4T4R sector deployment (provided by part of an 8T8R RRU)
5.2.2.1 Benefits
Table 5-4 describes the benefits offered by uplink 4-antenna receive diversity compared with
uplink 2-antenna receive diversity.
Table 5-4 Benefits offered by uplink 4-antenna receive diversity
Scenario Improvement over Uplink 2- Description

Antenna Receive Diversity
Weak Increases the Cell Uplink Average For a single UE, the farther
coverage, Throughput by 30% to 65%. away it is from the cell center,
medium the higher the gains are.
interference,

eRAN
Scenario Improvement over Uplink 2- Description

or high Increases the uplink edge throughput by For a cell, the more CEUs it
interference 50% to 170%. accommodates, the higher the
gains are.
Small inter- Increases the Cell Uplink Average
site distance Throughput by up to 30%.
and low
interference Increases the uplink edge throughput by
up to 60%.
N/A Improves the uplink cell coverage by 3 None

dB to 5 dB.
Uplink 4-antenna receive diversity requires that the feeders between physical antennas and
RRUs be of the same type and the difference in length between the feeders be less than 1 m.
Otherwise, the gains may be reduced.
5.2.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
None
5.2.3 Requirements
5.2.3.1 Licenses
FDD LOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna LT1S0U4ARD00 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
TDD TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna LT1STU4ARD00 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
(TDD).

eRAN
5.2.3.2 Software
None

None
5.2.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

For FDD, the following base stations are compatible with this function:
l 3900 and 5900 series base stations

l BTS3203E
For TDD, 3900 and 5900 series base stations are compatible with this function.
Boards
This function requires 4R BBPs.
RF Modules
Some RF modules cannot be combined to serve a 2T4R cell. These modules are RRU3201,
RRU3203, RRU3808, and LRFU.
If two MRFUd modules are combined, the recommended mode is 2T2R+0T2R.
Cells
If two antennas are combined for use, both uplink MIMO and downlink MIMO require that
the antennas have the same azimuth and downtilt angle.
In TDD, the cell bandwidth must be greater than 5 MHz.
5.2.3.4 Others
None


eRAN
example.

Name

and reception 4T4R.
mode
CRS Port Cell.CrsPortNum N/A For 8T4P cells, set this

Number parameter to
CRS_PORT_4. For
8T2P cells, set this
parameter to
CRS_PORT_2.

Port Mapping 4T4P_0321.
Maximum CellDlschAlgo.Ma N/A For 8T4P cells, the value

MIMO layers _4 is recommended. For
8T2P cells, the default
value is recommended.
Compatibility eNodeBAlgoSwitc Tm3Tm4Max4Lay Select this option.

Control Switch h.CompatibilityCtrl erCtrlSwitch
Switch




eRAN

(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0




(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0


Set up a 4T4R cell.
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, SECNAME="0", LOCATIONNAME="0", USERLABEL="0", ANTNUM=4,
ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0,
ANT2N=R0B, ANT3CN=0, ANT3SRN=60, ANT3SN=0, ANT3N=R0C, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=60,
ANT4SN=0, ANT4N=R0D, CREATESECTOREQM=TRUE, SECTOREQMID=0;



eRAN



(not category 5)
//Activating cell 0

N/A


Monitoring

system bandwidth

(TDD)
----End
Network Monitoring

eRAN



5.3 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity (TDD)
5.3.1 Principles
Uplink 8-antenna receive diversity requires that a cell have at least eight RX channels. The
eight RX channels receive the same signal of a UE from different directions to improve
reception quality.
Uplink 8-antenna receive diversity can be deployed in 8T8R cells. The numbers of TX and
RX channels provided by the hardware must be greater than or equal to the numbers of TX
and RX channels in the cell. The TX/RX mode of a cell is specified by the Cell.TxRxMode
parameter.

eRAN
An 8T8R cell is set up on an 8T8R sector. An 8T8R sector can be served by an 8T8R RRU.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the deployment. Connect the RRU's CAL calibration port and the
antenna system's CAL calibration port.
5.3.2.1 Benefits
Table 5-8 describes the benefits offered by uplink 8-antenna receive diversity compared with
uplink 4-antenna receive diversity.
Table 5-8 Benefits offered by uplink 8-antenna receive diversity

Improvement over Uplink 4- Description
Increases the Cell Uplink Average For a single UE, the farther away it is from the cell
Throughput by 10% to 30%. center, the higher the gains are.
Increases the uplink edge For a cell, the more CEUs it accommodates, the
throughput. higher the gains are.
Improves the uplink cell coverage None

by 3 dB.

eRAN
5.3.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
None
5.3.3 Requirements
5.3.3.1 Licenses
TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna LT1STU8ARD01 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
channels. For details, see License Control Item Lists (TDD).
5.3.3.2 Software
None

None
5.3.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

Boards
RF Modules
No requirements

eRAN
Cells
The cell bandwidth must be greater than 5 MHz.
5.3.3.4 Others
None

not. Table 5-9 describes the parameters for activation using the setup of an 8T8R cell as an
example.


reception mode
CRS Port Number Cell.CrsPortNum For 8T4P cells, set this

parameter to CRS_PORT_4.
For 8T2P cells, set this
parameter to CRS_PORT_2.
CRS Antenna Port Cell.CrsPortMap For an 8T4P cell:

Mapping l 8T4P_00112233 is
recommended for wide beam
antennas.
l 8T4P_01230123 is
recommended for non-wide
beam antennas.
For an 8T2P cell:
l 8T2P_00001111 is
recommended for wide beam
antennas.
l 8T2P_00110011 is
recommended for non-wide
beam antennas.
Maximum number of CellDlschAlgo.MaxMimo For 8T4P cells, the value

MIMO layers RankPara SW_MAX_SM_RANK_4 is
recommended. For 8T2P cells,
the default value is
recommended.

eRAN

Set up an 8T8R cell.
ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANT3CN=0, ANT3SRN=60, ANT3SN=0,
ANT3N=R0C, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=60, ANT4SN=0, ANT4N=R0D, ANT5CN=0, ANT5SRN=60,
ANT5SN=0, ANT5N=R0E, ANT6CN=0, ANT6SRN=60, ANT6SN=0, ANT6N=R0F, ANT7CN=0,
ANT7SRN=60, ANT7SN=0, ANT7N=R0G, ANT8CN=0, ANT8SRN=60, ANT8SN=0, ANT8N=R0H,
CREATESECTOREQM=TRUE, SECTOREQMID=0;




//Activating cell 0

N/A


Monitoring

system bandwidth

eRAN


(TDD)
----End
Network Monitoring




eRAN
5.4 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO (FDD)
5.4.1 Principles
Uplink MU-MIMO is controlled by the UlVmimoSwitch option of the
CellAlgoSwitch.UlSchSwitch parameter. To enable 2x2 MU-MIMO in a cell, select this
option and ensure that the cell works in at least 2R mode. This feature can be used for UEs
when channel conditions are favorable.
The eNodeB attempts to pair UEs in each transmission time interval (TTI). If the pairing
succeeds, the eNodeB performs 2x2 MU-MIMO.
UE Selection
In each TTI, the eNodeB schedules UEs in sequence. If all resources are used up but some
UEs are still not scheduled, the eNodeB attempts to pair unscheduled UEs with scheduled
UEs.
Pairing Judgment
Based on the pre-pairing SINR and inter-UE channel correlation, the eNodeB calculates the
post-pairing SINR and then calculates the post-pairing spectral efficiency.
The eNodeB pairs two UEs only if the total post-pairing spectral efficiency is higher than the
total pre-pairing spectral efficiency.
5.4.2.1 Benefits
Uplink MU-MIMO provides a higher Cell Uplink Average Throughput than uplink receive
diversity. Uplink MU-MIMO can offer significant gains when the following conditions are
met:
l The PUSCH load is high. That is, the uplink physical resource block (PRB) usage
exceeds 90%.
l There are adequate PDCCH resources for UE pairing. That is, the control channel
element (CCE) usage is less than 80%.
5.4.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
Uplink coverage may deteriorate and CEU throughput may decrease in high interference
scenarios because more UEs are scheduled in uplink MU-MIMO.

eRAN
Function Impacts
Name Switch
FDD VoIP semi- SpsSchSwitch VoLTE To ensure good post-

TDD persistent option of the pairing demodulation
scheduling CellAlgoSwitc performance, VoIP UEs
h.UlSchSwitch are not involved in
parameter pairing for MU-MIMO
when the number of RBs
semi-persistently
scheduled for such a UE
is less than 2.
FDD UL CoMP UlJointRecepti UL CoMP UEs selected for UL

TDD onSwitch CoMP are not involved
option of the in pairing for uplink MU-
CellAlgoSwitc MIMO. Type-1 UL
h.UplinkComp CoMP has the highest
Switch priority, uplink MU-
parameter MIMO the second, and
type-2 UL CoMP the
third.
FDD PSIC receiver MumimoPusch PSIC Receiver The PSIC receiver can be
TDD PsicSwitch used in uplink MU-
option of the MIMO to improve signal
CellAlgoSwitc reception quality for
h.PsicSwitch paired UEs.
parameter
FDD High speed Cell.HighSpeed High Speed UEs moving at high

TDD mobility Flag Mobility speed are not involved in
pairing for uplink MU-
MIMO.
FDD Uplink joint CellAlgoSwitc SFN UEs selected for uplink

TDD reception in an h.SfnUplinkCo joint reception in an SFN
SFN cell mpSwitch cell are not involved in
MIMO. Uplink joint
reception takes
precedence over uplink
MU-MIMO.
TDD Uplink RMT_INF_PU Interference If this function is enabled

enhancement SCH_ENH_S Detection and and the eNodeB has
for remote W option of the Suppression detected atmospheric
interference UlInterfSuppr duct remote interference,
suppression essCfg.RemoteI uplink MU-MIMO does
nfULEnhanceS not take effect.
w parameter

eRAN

Name Switch
TDD Uplink UL_ICS_SWI UL ICS (TDD) UEs classified as A, B, or

interference TCH option of C by uplink interference
coordination the coordination are not
CellAlgoSwitc involved in pairing for
h.UlIcSwitch uplink MU-MIMO.
parameter
5.4.3 Requirements
5.4.3.1 Licenses
LOFD-001002 UL 2x2 MU- LT1S0U2I2O00 Per Cell

MIMO
channels. For details, see License Control Item Lists (FDD).
5.4.3.2 Software
None

Adaptive power allocation AdptCellEdgePwrAllocSw None

for cell-edge UEs option of the
CellAlgoSwitch.CellDlCov
erEnhanceSwitch
parameter
Static Shared Beam N/A Massive MIMO (FDD)

Dynamic Dedicated Beam

eRAN
5.4.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

The following base stations are compatible with this function:

l DBS3900 LampSite and DBS5900 LampSite
Boards
RF Modules
No requirements
5.4.3.4 Others
None


Name
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.Ul UlVmimoSwitch Select this option.

switch SchSwitch

//Configuring uplink MU-MIMO
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0,UlSchSwitch=UlVmimoSwitch-1;

N/A

eRAN
Deactivation Command Examples

//Disabling uplink MU-MIMO

Step 1 Start an MU-MIMO monitoring task on the U2000 client to monitor the number of UE pairs
in uplink MU-MIMO.
Monitoring
Mimo UE Pair Pair 0 to 32000 This item indicates the total number of
Num UE pairs in all TTIs of a monitoring
period. This number increases by one
when two UEs are paired for MU-
MIMO in a TTI.
Step 2 Enable multiple UEs to access the network.
Step 3 Check whether uplink MU-MIMO has taken effect.

Item for Monitoring Monitoring Description
Result
Mimo UE Pair Num Not N/A MU-MIMO has been enabled.
Greater than 0 UEs are successfully paired.
----End
Network Monitoring
Use the counters listed in Table 5-13 to monitor uplink MU-MIMO. If any counter has a non-
zero value, uplink MU-MIMO is functioning properly. If the counter values are always zero,
uplink MU-MIMO is not functioning properly.
Table 5-13 Counters related to uplink MU-MIMO

1526728349 L.ChMeas.VMIMO.PairPRB.Succ
1526728350 L.ChMeas.VMIMO.PairPRB.Tot

eRAN
5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
5.5.1 Principles
Uplink MU-MIMO is controlled by the UlVmimoSwitch option of the
CellAlgoSwitch.UlSchSwitch parameter. To enable 2x4 MU-MIMO in a cell, select this
option and ensure that the cell works in at least 4R mode. This function can be used for UEs
when channel conditions are favorable.
The eNodeB attempts to pair UEs in each TTI. If the pairing succeeds, the eNodeB performs
2x4 MU-MIMO. Figure 5-17 shows uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO.
Figure 5-17 Uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO
UE Selection
In each TTI, the eNodeB schedules UEs in sequence. If all resources are used up but some
UEs are still not scheduled, the eNodeB attempts to pair unscheduled UEs with scheduled
UEs.
Pairing Judgment
Based on the pre-pairing SINR and inter-UE channel correlation, the eNodeB calculates the
post-pairing SINR and then calculates the post-pairing spectral efficiency.
The eNodeB pairs two UEs only if the total post-pairing spectral efficiency is higher than the
total pre-pairing spectral efficiency.
MU-MIMO Enhancement (TDD)

Table 5-14 describes the functions that enhance MU-MIMO in TDD. These functions can
take effect only when MU-MIMO has been enabled.

eRAN
Table 5-14 MU-MIMO enhancement functions (TDD)

Function Function Function Description Benefit
Name Switch
Enhanced MU- CellUlschAlgo Pairs UEs that will Optimizes pairing results
MIMO .EnhancedVm achieve the highest and increases post-pairing
imoSwitch benefits after pairing. throughput.
MU-MIMO for VMIMORedu Decreases MCS indexes Increases the pairing

UEs with ceMCSRiseR and uses more resource probability.
Lowered BSwitch blocks (RBs) for UEs
MCSs option of the with a small amount of
CellAlgoSwitc data.
h.UlSchSwitch
parameter
MU-MIMO for VoLTEUeVmi Allows UEs with VoLTE Expands the VoLTE UE
VoLTE UEs moSwitch services to be involved in capacity of a cell.
option of the pairing for MU-MIMO.
CellAlgoSwitc
h.UlSchSwitch
parameter
MU-MIMO VMIMOResR Randomizes MU-MIMO Reduces inter-cell

Resource andomSwitch resource allocation by interference caused by
Randomization option of the adjusting the proportion allocation of the same
CellUlschAlgo of RBs preferentially time-frequency resources
.VmimoOptAl allocated to cell edge to UEs.
goSwitch users (CEUs).
parameter This proportion is
specified by the
CellUlschAlgo.VMIMOE
gdeResRatio parameter.
5.5.2.1 Benefits
met:
l In FDD, PUSCH load is high. That is, the uplink PRB usage exceeds 90%.
l In TDD, PUSCH load is high. That is, the uplink PRB usage exceeds 65%.
l There are adequate PDCCH resources for UE pairing. That is, the CCE usage is less than
80%.

eRAN
5.5.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
Uplink coverage may deteriorate and CEU throughput may decrease in high interference
For TDD, there are also the following impacts:
l The CCE usage and CCE allocation failure rate may increase in high load scenarios
because more UEs are scheduled in uplink MU-MIMO.
l The E-RAB setup delay may decrease in high load scenarios because UEs have more
chances to be scheduled in uplink MU-MIMO.
l The number of uplink preallocation times may increase and the number of RBs used in
uplink preallocation may also increase. This is because UEs have more chances to be
scheduled and their uplink data transmission can be completed in a shorter time when
both uplink preallocation and uplink MU-MIMO are enabled.
l The number of uplink error bits in uplink MU-MIMO may increase when the number of
pairing times is low. This is because the modulation and coding scheme (MCS) selection
mechanism for paired UEs is independent of that for unpaired UEs.
Function Impacts
Name
FDD VoIP semi- SpsSchSwitch VoLTE To ensure good post-

TDD persistent option of the pairing demodulation
scheduling CellAlgoSwitch.UlS performance, VoIP UEs
chSwitch parameter are not involved in
pairing for MU-MIMO
when the number of RBs
semi-persistently
scheduled for such a UE
is less than 2.
FDD UL CoMP UlJointReceptionS- UL CoMP UEs selected for UL

TDD witch option of the CoMP are not involved
CellAlgoSwitch.Upl in pairing for uplink MU-
inkCompSwitch MIMO. Type-1 UL
parameter CoMP has the highest
priority, uplink MU-
MIMO the second, and
type-2 UL CoMP the
third.
FDD PSIC MumimoPuschPsic PSIC Receiver The PSIC receiver can be

TDD receiver Switch option of the used in uplink MU-
CellAlgoSwitch.Psi MIMO to improve signal
cSwitch parameter reception quality for
paired UEs.

eRAN

Name
FDD High speed Cell.HighSpeedFla High Speed UEs moving at high

TDD mobility g Mobility speed are not involved in
MIMO.
FDD Uplink CellAlgoSwitch.Sfn SFN UEs selected for uplink

TDD joint UplinkCompSwitch joint reception in an SFN
reception cell are not involved in
in an SFN pairing for uplink MU-
cell MIMO. Uplink joint
reception takes
precedence over uplink
MU-MIMO.
TDD Uplink RMT_INF_PUSC Interference If this function is enabled

enhanceme H_ENH_SW option Detection and and the eNodeB has
nt for of the Suppression detected atmospheric
remote UlInterfSuppressC duct remote interference,
interferenc fg.RemoteInfULEn uplink MU-MIMO does
e hanceSw parameter not take effect.
suppressio
n
TDD Uplink UL_ICS_SWITCH UL ICS (TDD) UEs classified as A, B, or

interferenc option of the C by uplink interference
e CellAlgoSwitch.UlI coordination are not
coordinatio cSwitch parameter involved in pairing for
n uplink MU-MIMO.
TDD Uplink SU- ULSUMIMO2Laye MIMO When this function is

MIMO rsSwitch option of enabled, uplink TM2
the UEs are not involved in
CellAlgoSwitch.UlS pairing for uplink MU-
uMimoAlgoSwitch MIMO.
parameter
TDD Intra- UlCamcSw option Uplink If a UE has been

eNodeB of the Coordinated involved in pairing for
UL CAMC CellAlgoSwitch.Ca Scheduling uplink MU-MIMO,
mcSwitch parameter CAMC is not performed
for it.
TDD Uplink UlIblerAdjustSwitc Scheduling The scheduling for

target h option of the uplink MU-MIMO
IBLER CellAlgoSwitch.UlS affects the accuracy of
setting chSwitch parameter uplink target IBLER
policies adaptation.
5.5.3 Requirements

eRAN
5.5.3.1 Licenses
FDD LOFD-001002 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO LT1S0U2I2O00 Per Cell
FDD LOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna LT1S0U4ARD00 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
FDD LOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO LT1S0UMIMO00 Per Cell
TDD TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna LT1STU4ARD00 Per Cell

Receive Diversity
TDD TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO LT1SULMUMI01 Per Cell
(TDD).
5.5.3.2 Software
None

RAT Function Name Function Reference Description
Switch
TDD Uplink static inter- ENodeBAlgoS ICIC Enhanced MU-MIMO

cell interference witch.UlIcicFr cannot work with this
coordination eqSwitch function. Enhanced MU-
MIMO is controlled by
the
CellUlschAlgo.Enhance
dVmimoSwitch
parameter.
FDD Static Shared Beam N/A Massive None

Dynamic Dedicated MIMO
Beam (FDD)

eRAN
5.5.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

Boards
In TDD, the LBBPc does not support enhanced MU-MIMO.
RF Modules
No requirements
5.5.3.4 Others
None
5.5.4.1 Data Configuration (FDD)


Name
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.Ul UlVmimoSwitch Select this option.

switch SchSwitch

//Configuring uplink MU-MIMO

N/A


eRAN

5.5.4.2 Data Configuration (TDD)


Parameter Parameter ID Option Setting
Name Notes
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.UlS l UlVmimoSwitch Selecting

switch chSwitch l VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBS- these
witch options is
recommen
l VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch ded.
Enhanced CellUlschAlgo.Enh N/A Turning on

VMIMO ancedVmimoSwitch this switch
Switch is
recommen
ded.
Vmimo CellUlschAlgo.Vmi VMIMOResRandomSwitch Selecting

Optimization moOptAlgoSwitch this option
Algorithm is
Switch recommen
ded.

//Configuring uplink MU-MIMO and MU-MIMO enhancement functions
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH:
LocalCellId=0,UlSchSwitch=UlVmimoSwitch-1&VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBSwitch-1&VoLTEUeVmim
oSwitch-1;
MOD CELLULSCHALGO:
LocalCellId=0,EnhancedVmimoSwitch=ON,VmimoOptAlgoSwitch=VMIMOResRandomSwitch-1;

N/A


eRAN

in uplink MU-MIMO.

Monitoring
Mimo UE Pair Num Pair 0 to 32000 This item indicates the total number of
UE pairs in all TTIs of a monitoring
MIMO in a TTI.
Item for Monitoring Result Description

Monitoring
Mimo UE Pair Num Not N/A Uplink MU-MIMO has been enabled.
----End
Network Monitoring
1526739789 L.ChMeas.VMIMO.PairPRB.Succ.VoLTE
1526739782 L.ChMeas.VMIMO.PairPRB2Layer.Succ

eRAN
1526740469 L.ChMeas.VMIMO.Succ.SubFrameNum
5.6 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)
5.6.1 Principles
The principles of uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO are similar to those of uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO. For
details, see 5.5.1 Principles. Uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO can work in at least 8R cells.
In 8R cells, UL CoMP UEs can be involved in pairing for MU-MIMO, depending on the
SimplePairedCompSw option of the CellAlgoSwitch.UplinkCompSwitch parameter:
l If the option is selected, UL CoMP UEs can be selected for pairing in non-SFN cells but
cannot in SFN cells.
l If this option is deselected, UL CoMP UEs are not selected for pairing and uplink MU-
MIMO takes precedence over type-1 CoMP.
5.6.2.1 Benefits
met:
l The PUSCH load is high. That is, the uplink physical resource block (PRB) usage
exceeds 90%.
80%.
5.6.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
MU-MIMO has the following network impacts:
l Uplink coverage may deteriorate and CEU throughput may decrease in high interference

eRAN
pairing times is low. This is because the MCS selection mechanism for paired UEs is
independent of that for unpaired UEs.
Function Impacts
Function Function Switch Reference Description
Name
VoIP semi- SpsSchSwitch VoLTE To ensure good post-pairing

persistent option of the demodulation performance,
scheduling CellAlgoSwitch.UlS VoIP UEs are not involved in
chSwitch parameter pairing for MU-MIMO when
the number of RBs semi-
persistently scheduled for
such a UE is less than 2.
Uplink RMT_INF_PUSC Interference If this function is enabled and

enhancement H_ENH_SW option Detection and the eNodeB has detected
for remote of the Suppression atmospheric duct remote
interference UlInterfSuppressC interference, uplink MU-
suppression fg.RemoteInfULEn MIMO does not take effect.
hanceSw parameter
Uplink UL_ICS_SWITCH UL ICS (TDD) UEs classified as A, B, or C

interference option of the by uplink interference
coordination CellAlgoSwitch.UlI coordination are not involved
cSwitch parameter in pairing for uplink MU-
MIMO.
Uplink SU- ULSUMIMO2Laye MIMO When this function is enabled,

MIMO rsSwitch option of uplink TM2 UEs are not
the involved in pairing for uplink
CellAlgoSwitch.UlS MU-MIMO.
uMimoAlgoSwitch
parameter
Intra-eNodeB UlCamcSw option Uplink If a UE has been involved in

UL CAMC of the Coordinated pairing for uplink MU-
CellAlgoSwitch.Ca Scheduling MIMO, CAMC is not
mcSwitch parameter performed for it.
Uplink target UlIblerAdjustSwitc Scheduling The scheduling for uplink

IBLER setting h option of the MU-MIMO affects the
policies CellAlgoSwitch.UlS accuracy of uplink target
chSwitch parameter IBLER adaptation.
5.6.3 Requirements

eRAN
5.6.3.1 Licenses
TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO LT1STUMIMO01 Per Cell
5.6.3.2 Software
None

None
5.6.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

Boards
RF Modules
No requirements
5.6.3.4 Others
None


eRAN

Parameter Name Parameter ID Option Setting Notes
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.UlS l UlVmimoSwitch Selecting these

switch chSwitch l VMIMOReduceMCS options is
RiseRBSwitch recommended.
l VoLTEUeVmimoSwit
ch
Uplink Comp CellAlgoSwitch.Upl SimplePairedCompSw Selecting this

Switch inkCompSwitch option is
recommended.
Enhanced VMIMO CellUlschAlgo.Enh N/A Turning on this

Switch ancedVmimoSwitch switch is
recommended.
Vmimo CellUlSchAlgo.Vmi VMIMOResRandomS- Selecting this

Optimization moOptAlgoSwitch witch option is
Algorithm Switch recommended.

//Configuring uplink MU-MIMO and MU-MIMO enhancement functions
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH:
LocalCellId=0,UlSchSwitch=UlVmimoSwitch-1&VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBSwitch-1&VoLTEUeVmim
oSwitch-1;
//(Optional) Turning on the UL CoMP switch
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0,UplinkCompSwitch=SimplePairedCompSw-1;
MOD CELLULSCHALGO:
LocalCellId=0,EnhancedVmimoSwitch=ON,VmimoOptAlgoSwitch=VMIMOResRandomSwitch-1;

N/A



eRAN
in uplink MU-MIMO.
Monitoring
MIMO in a TTI.

Monitoring
----End
Network Monitoring


eRAN
5.7 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)
5.7.1 Principles
Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO is controlled by the HighOrderVMIMOSwitch option of the
CellAlgoSwitch.UlSchSwitch parameter. To enable uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO in a cell, select
this option and ensure that the cell works in at least 8R mode. This function can be used for
UEs when channel conditions are favorable.
The eNodeB attempts to group UEs in each TTI. Specifically, it attempts UE pairing first for
uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO. If successful, it continues to attempt pairing with other UEs. If
successful, uplink 4x8 MIMO is performed.
Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO supports uplink-downlink subframe configuration 2.
Table 5-20 describes the functions that enhance uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO. These functions can
take effect only when MU-MIMO has been enabled.
Table 5-20 Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO enhancement functions
Function Function Function Description Benefits

Name Switch
MU-MIMO for VMIMORedu Selects MCSs indicated Increases the UE pairing

UEs with ceMCSRiseR by smaller indexes and probability.
Lowered BSwitch uses more resource blocks
MCSs option of the (RBs) for UEs with a
CellAlgoSwitc small amount of data.
h.UlSchSwitch
parameter
MU-MIMO for VoLTEUeVmi Allows UEs with VoLTE Expands the VoLTE UE
VoLTE UEs moSwitch services to be involved in capacity of a cell.
option of the UE pairing.
CellAlgoSwitc
h.UlSchSwitch
parameter
MU-MIMO VMIMOResR Randomizes MU-MIMO Reduces inter-cell

Resource andomSwitch resource allocation by interference caused by
Randomization option of the adjusting the proportion allocation of the same
CellUlschAlgo of RBs preferentially time-frequency resources
.VmimoOptAl allocated to cell edge to UEs.
goSwitch users (CEUs).
parameter This proportion is
specified by the
CellUlschAlgo.VMIMOE
gdeResRatio parameter.

eRAN
The maximum number of UEs that can be involved in UE pairing for uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO
is specified by the CellUlSchAlgo.MaxLayerHOVMIMO parameter.
In 8R cells, UL CoMP UEs can be involved in UE pairing, depending on the
SimplePairedCompSw option of the CellAlgoSwitch.UplinkCompSwitch parameter:
l If this option is selected, UL CoMP UEs can be involved in UE pairing but only a
maximum of two layers can be involved. UL CoMP UEs in SFN cells cannot be
involved in UE pairing.
l If this option is deselected, UL CoMP UEs cannot be involved in UE pairing and uplink
MU-MIMO takes precedence over type-1 CoMP.
5.7.2.1 Benefits
Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO provides a higher average uplink throughput than uplink receive
diversity. Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO can offer significant gains when the following conditions
are met:
l The PUSCH load is high. That is, the uplink PRB usage exceeds 90%.
80%.
5.7.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
MU-MIMO has the following network impacts:
l Uplink coverage may deteriorate and CEU throughput may decrease in high interference
pairing times is low. This is because the MCS selection mechanism for paired UEs is
independent of that for unpaired UEs.

eRAN
Function Impacts
Function Function Switch Reference Description
Name
VoIP semi- SpsSchSwitch VoLTE To ensure good post-pairing

persistent option of the demodulation performance,
scheduling CellAlgoSwitch.UlS VoIP UEs are not involved in
chSwitch parameter pairing for MU-MIMO when
the number of RBs semi-
persistently scheduled for
such a UE is less than 2.
Uplink RMT_INF_PUSC Interference If this function is enabled and

enhancement H_ENH_SW option Detection and the eNodeB has detected
for remote of the Suppression atmospheric duct remote
interference UlInterfSuppressC interference, uplink MU-
suppression fg.RemoteInfULEn MIMO does not take effect.
hanceSw parameter
Uplink UL_ICS_SWITCH UL ICS (TDD) UEs classified as A, B, or C

interference option of the by uplink interference
coordination CellAlgoSwitch.UlI coordination are not involved
cSwitch parameter in pairing for uplink MU-
MIMO.
Uplink SU- ULSUMIMO2Laye MIMO When this function is enabled,

MIMO rsSwitch option of uplink TM2 UEs are not
the involved in pairing for uplink
CellAlgoSwitch.UlS MU-MIMO.
uMimoAlgoSwitch
parameter
Intra-eNodeB UlCamcSw option Uplink If a UE has been involved in

UL CAMC of the Coordinated pairing for uplink MU-
CellAlgoSwitch.Ca Scheduling MIMO, CAMC is not
mcSwitch parameter performed for it.
5.7.3 Requirements
5.7.3.1 Licenses
TDLOFD-130203 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO LT1SUL4X8M00 per cell
TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna LT1STU8ARD01 Per Cell

Receive Diversity

eRAN

NOTE
Uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO can be used without a license in 60 days after an upgrade to eRAN TDD 13.0. It
needs to be licensed for use after this period.
5.7.3.2 Software
Uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO UlVmimoSwitch option of 5.6 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO

the (TDD)
CellAlgoSwitch.UlSchSwit
ch parameter

Enhanced MU-MIMO CellUlschAlgo.EnhancedV 5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

mimoSwitch
5.7.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

Boards
LBBP boards do not support uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO.
RF Modules
No requirements
5.7.3.4 Others
None

eRAN


Name
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.UlS UlVmimoSwitch Selecting these

switch chSwitch options is
HighOrderVMIMOS- recommended.
witch
VMIMOReduceMCSRi-
seRBSwitch
VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch
Uplink Comp CellAlgoSwitch.Upl SimplePairedCompSw Selecting this option

Switch inkCompSwitch is recommended.
Vmimo CellUlSchAlgo.Vmi VMIMOResRandomS- Selecting this option

Optimization moOptAlgoSwitch witch is recommended.
Algorithm
Switch

//Configuring uplink 4x8 MU-MIMO and MU-MIMO enhancement functions
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH:
LocalCellId=0,UlSchSwitch=UlVmimoSwitch-1&HighOrderVMIMOSwitch-1&VMIMOReduceMCSRis
eRBSwitch-1&VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch-1;
//(Optional) Turning on the UL CoMP switch
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0,UplinkCompSwitch=SimplePairedCompSw-1;
MOD CELLULSCHALGO: LocalCellId=0,VmimoOptAlgoSwitch=VMIMOResRandomSwitch-1;
MOD CELLULSCHALGO: LocalCellId=0,MaxLayerHOVMIMO= 4LAYER;

N/A



eRAN
in uplink MU-MIMO.
Monitoring
MIMO in a TTI.

Monitoring
----End
Network Monitoring


eRAN
5.8 UL SU-MIMO
5.8.1 Principles
Uplink SU-MIMO allows 2T UEs to work in transmission mode 2 (TM2).
5.8.1.1 Uplink Transmission Modes

Uplink SU-MIMO is controlled by the ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch option of the
CellAlgoSwitch.UlSuMimoAlgoSwitch parameter.
l When this option is deselected, all UEs in the cell can work only in TM1.
l When this option is selected, 2T UEs in the cell can work in TM2.
Table 5-23 describes the uplink transmission modes.
Table 5-23 Uplink transmission modes
Transmission Number of Number of Layers Rank

Mode Codewords
TM1 1 1 1
TM2 1 1 1
2 2 2
5.8.1.2 Rank Selection

The rank selected in TM2 is specified by the CellUlMimoParaCfg.UlSuMimoRankPara
parameter.
l When this parameter is set to FixRank1, all UEs use rank 1 transmission.
l When this parameter is set to FixRank2, all UEs use rank 2 transmission.
l When this parameter is set to RankAdaptive, UE 1 in poor channel conditions uses rank
1 transmission and UE 2 in good channel conditions uses rank 2 transmission, as shown
in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Adaptive rank selection

eRAN
5.8.1.3 SRS Configuration Policy (TDD)

In TDD, the eNodeB can preferentially allocate resources for two-antenna-port SRSs
(including long-term SRSs) in uplink SU-MIMO. This function is controlled by the
SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO option of the SRSCfg.SrsCfgPolicySwitch parameter. It is
recommended that this option be selected for uplink SU-MIMO.
5.8.2.1 Benefits
Uplink SU-MIMO provides the following benefits when there are 2T UEs in a cell:
l Nearly doubles the uplink peak throughput.
l Increases the User Uplink Average Throughput of non-cell-edge UEs by 5% to 20%.
l Increases the Cell Uplink Average Throughput.
SU-MIMO offers higher gains in the following conditions:
l The eNodeB has more RX antennas.
l The average uplink SINR is higher.
l A larger proportion of UEs support SU-MIMO.
5.8.2.2 Impacts
Network Impacts
None
Function Impacts
Name Switch
FDD Uplink 2x4 UlVmimoSwitc 5.5 UL 2x4 UEs selected for uplink
TDD MU-MIMO h option of the MU-MIMO SU-MIMO are not
CellAlgoSwitch. selected for MU-MIMO.
UlSchSwitch
parameter
FDD UL CoMP cell UlJointReceptio UL CoMP This function does not

TDD nSwitch option apply to UEs performing
of the rank 2 transmission in
CellAlgoSwitch. TM2.
UplinkCompSwi
tch parameter
FDD PAMC UlPAMCSwitch Scheduling PAMC is not performed

TDD option of the on uplink SU-MIMO
CellAlgoSwitch. UEs.
UlSchExtSwitch
parameter

eRAN

Name Switch
FDD Turbo receiver CellAlgoSwitch. Turbo This function does not

TDD TurboReceiverS Receiver apply to UEs performing
witch rank 2 transmission in
TM2.
FDD Intra-eNodeB CellAlgoSwitch. Uplink
and inter- UplinkIcSwitch Interference
eNodeB Cancellation
uplink (FDD)
interference
cancellation
FDD Uplink joint CellAlgoSwitch. SFN Uplink joint reception

reception SfnUplinkComp does not apply to UEs
Switch performing rank 2
transmission in TM2.
TDD DL CoMP cell IntraDlCompS DL CoMP None of these functions

witch option of (TDD) can take effect at the same
the time as uplink SU-MIMO.
CellAlgoSwitch. For a given UE, the one
DlCompSwitch enabled first takes effect.
parameter
TDD Uplink UL_ICS_SWIT UL ICS (TDD)

interference CH option of the
coordination CellAlgoSwitch.
UlIcSwitch
parameter
TDD Intra-eNodeB UlCamcSw Uplink

UL CAMC option of the Coordinated
CellAlgoSwitch. Scheduling
CamcSwitch
parameter
TDD Uplink CA CaUl2CCSwitc Carrier This function and uplink

h option of the Aggregation SU-MIMO cannot take
CaMgtCfg.Cell effect simultaneously. If a
CaAlgoSwitch UE is selected for uplink
parameter CA, it exits uplink SU-
MIMO.
TDD Dual-stream CellAlgoSwitch. Beamforming After uplink SU-MIMO is

beamforming BfAlgoSwitch (TDD) enabled, two antennas
send SRSs. The weights
for dual-stream
beamforming are more
accurate and the
performance of this
function may improve.

eRAN

Name Switch
TDD Interference CellAlgoSwitch. Interference Rank 1 transmission is

detection and AvoidInterfSwit Detection and always used in uplink SU-
suppression ch Suppression MIMO if PUSCH
enhancement for remote
TDD PUSCH RMT_INF_PU None interference suppression is
enhancement SCH_ENH_SW enabled (by using the
for remote option of the UlInterfSuppressCfg.Re
interference UlInterfSuppre moteInfULEnhanceSw
suppression ssCfg.RemoteIn parameter) and the
fULEnhanceSw eNodeB has detected
parameter atmospheric duct remote
interference.
5.8.3 Requirements
5.8.3.1 Licenses
RAT Feature Feature Name Model Sales Unit
ID
FDD LOFD-130 UL SU-MIMO LT1SULSU Per Cell

201 MIMO
TDD TDLOFD- UL SU-MIMO LT1SULSU Per Cell

120201 MM00
(TDD).
5.8.3.2 Software
RAT Function Name Function Switch Reference
TDD Uplink-downlink Cell.SubframeAssignment Subframe

subframe Configuration
configuration 1&2 (TDD)
FDD None N/A N/A

eRAN

RAT Function Name Function Switch Reference
FDD High speed mobility Cell.HighSpeedFlag High Speed

TDD Mobility
FDD Uplink FDD+TDD InterFddTddCaSwitch option of Carrier

TDD CA the CaMgtCfg.CellCaAlgoSwitch Aggregation
parameter
TDD SFN cell Cell.MultiRruCellMode SFN
TDD Downlink D-MIMO DmimoJTSwitch option of the D-MIMO

CellAlgoSwitch.DMIMOAlgoSwi (TDD)
tch parameter
TDD Soft split scheduling SsrdSchOptSwitch option of the Soft Split

optimization for ENodeBAlgoSwitch.SSRDAlgoS Resource
intra-frequency split witch parameter Duplex (TDD)
TDD Extended CP Cell.UlCyclicPrefix Extended CP
TDD ePDCCH EpdcchFunctionSwitch option of Physical

the Channel
CellPdcchAlgo.EpdcchAlgoSwitc Resource
h parameter Management
TDD Inter-cell downlink InterCellDmimoJTSwitch option D-MIMO

D-MIMO of the (TDD)
CellAlgoSwitch.DMIMOAlgoSwi
tch parameter
TDD Massive MIMO N/A Massive MIMO

introduction (TDD)
FDD Static Shared Beam N/A Massive MIMO

Dynamic Dedicated (FDD)
Beam None
5.8.3.3 Hardware
Base Station Models

For FDD, the following base stations are compatible with this function:

l DBS3900 LampSite and DBS5900 LampSite
l BTS3912E
l BTS3911E
For TDD, 3900 and 5900 series base stations are compatible with this function.

eRAN
Boards
This function requires the UBBPd or UBBPe.
RF Modules
No requirements
Cells
This function requires that cells have a bandwidth of 10 MHz or higher and have two or more
RX channels.
For TDD, this function cannot be used in massive MIMO cells.
5.8.3.4 Others
UEs must have two transmit channels.
5.8.4.1 Data Configuration (FDD)

UL SU-MIMO CellAlgoSwitch.UlS ULSUMIMO2Layer Selecting this option

Algorithm Switch uMimoAlgoSwitch sSwitch is recommended.
UpLink SU-MIMO CellUlMimoParaCf N/A The value

Rank g.UlSuMimoRankP RankAdaptive is
ara recommended.
Table 5-25 describes the parameters used for function optimization.
Table 5-25 Parameters used for optimization
SRS Configuration SRSCfg.SrsCfgInd N/A The value

Indicator BOOLEAN_TRUE
is recommended.

eRAN
FDD SRS SRSCfg.FddSrsCfg N/A The value

Configuration Mode Mode DEFAULTMODE
is recommended.
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.UlS SchedulerCtrlPo- Selecting this option

switch chSwitch werSwitch is recommended if
uplink SU-MIMO is
enabled.
CA UE RLC RlcPdcpParaGrou N/A Set this parameter to

Parameter Adaptive p.CaUeRlcParaAdp the recommended
Threshold tiveThd value.
CA UE Reordering RlcPdcpParaGrou N/A Set this parameter to

Timer p.CaUeReorderingT the recommended
imer value.
CA UE Status RlcPdcpParaGrou N/A Set this parameter to

Prohibit Timer p.CaUeStatProhTi the recommended
mer value.
Uplink power CellAlgoSwitch.Ul UlCaPuschPcOptS- Selecting this option

control algorithm PcAlgoSwitch witch is recommended.
switch

//Enabling uplink SU-MIMO and rank adaptation
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LOCALCELLID=0, UlSuMimoAlgoSwitch = ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch-1;
MOD CELLULMIMOPARACFG: LocalCellId=0, UlSuMimoRankPara = RankAdaptive;

//Specifying an SRS configuration policy
MOD SRSCFG: LocalCellId=0, SrsCfgInd=BOOLEAN_TRUE, FddSrsCfgMode=DEFAULTMODE;
//Enabling power control by the uplink scheduler
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0, UlSchSwitch=SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch-1;
Adjust parameters in uplink CA scenarios.

//Configuring an RLC/PDCP parameter group
MOD RLCPDCPPARAGROUP: RlcPdcpParaGroupId=5, RlcMode=RlcMode_AM,
CaUeRlcParaAdptiveThd=10, CaUeReorderingTimer=Treordering_m20,
CaUeStatProhTimer=m20;
//Enabling PUSCH power control optimization for uplink CA UEs
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0, UlPcAlgoSwitch=UlCaPuschPcOptSwitch-1;

//Disabling uplink SU-MIMO

eRAN

5.8.4.2 Data Configuration (TDD)

SRS Configuration SRSCfg.SrsCfgInd N/A The value

Indicator BOOLEAN_TRUE
is recommended.
TDD SRS SRSCfg.TddSrsCfg N/A The value

Configuration Mode Mode EXPERIENCE_E
NHANCED or
ACCESS_ENHAN
CED is
recommended.
SRS Configure SRSCfg.SrsCfgPoli SRSPolicyforUL2L Selecting this option

Policy Switch cySwitch ayersMIMO is recommended.
UL SU-MIMO CellAlgoSwitch.UlS ULSUMIMO2Laye Selecting this option

Algorithm Switch uMimoAlgoSwitch rsSwitch is recommended.
Uplink schedule CellAlgoSwitch.UlS SchedulerCtrlPo- Selecting this option

switch chSwitch werSwitch is recommended
during a full buffer
service test if the
PRB usage is less
than 50%.
UpLink SU-MIMO CellUlMimoParaCf N/A The value

Rank g.UlSuMimoRankP RankAdaptive is
ara recommended.

//Configuring an SRS configuration policy
MOD SRSCFG: LocalCellId=0, SrsCfgInd=BOOLEAN_TRUE,TddSrsCfgMode=ACCESS_ENHANCED,
SrsCfgPolicySwitch = SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO-1;
//Enabling uplink SU-MIMO and rank adaptation

eRAN
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LOCALCELLID=0, UlSuMimoAlgoSwitch =

ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch-1,UlSchSwitch=SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch-1;
MOD CELLULMIMOPARACFG: LocalCellId=0, UlSuMimoRankPara = RankAdaptive;

N/A

//Disabling uplink SU-MIMO

l Uu DCI status monitoring
Uplink SU-MIMO is active if PDCCH downlink control information (DCI) format 4 is
used in TM2 at least once. The number of times this format can be obtained via Uu DCI
status monitoring.
l Counter observation
Uplink SU-MIMO is active if any of the counters listed in Table 5-27 has a value greater
than 0.
Table 5-27 Counters related to uplink SU-MIMO

1526746681 L.Traffic.User.ULSUMIMO.Avg
1526743750 L.ChMeas.ULMIMO.PRB.CL.Rank1
1526743751 L.ChMeas.ULMIMO.PRB.CL.Rank2
Benefit Monitoring
Uplink SU-MIMO increases the User Uplink Average Throughput and Cell Uplink
Average Throughput. Table 5-28 lists the related counters.
l User Uplink Average Throughput = (L.Thrp.bits.UL –

L.Thrp.bits.UE.UL.LastTTI)/L.Thrp.Time.UE.UL.RmvLastTTI
l Cell Uplink Average Throughput = L.Thrp.bits.UL /
L.Thrp.Time.Cell.UL.HighPrecision
A higher proportion of RBs used for rank 2 transmission indicates a higher increase in
throughput.

eRAN
Proportion of RBs used for rank 2 transmission = L.ChMeas.ULMIMO.PRB.CL.Rank2 /

L.ChMeas.PRB.PUSCH.Avg
Table 5-28 Counters for calculating the average uplink cell throughput
1526729049 L.Thrp.bits.UE.UL.LastTTI
1526729050 L.Thrp.Time.UE.UL.RmvLastTTI
CCE Monitoring
When uplink SU-MIMO is active, DCI format 4 is used in scheduling. When uplink SU-
MIMO is inactive, DCI format 0 is used in scheduling. Compared with DCI format 0, DCI
format 4 results in a higher payload. It may also result in higher CCE usage and greater values
of the counters listed in Table 5-29. The increase depends on UE quantity and cell load.
Table 5-29 CCE-related counters

1526728304 L.ChMeas.CCE.ULUsed
1526729295 L.ChMeas.CCE.ULUsed.Equivalent
526730844 L.ChMeas.CCE.UL.AllocFail
The increase in CCE usage may result in changes in the values of the counters listed in Table
5-30.
Table 5-30 CCE-associated counters

1526728774 L.RRC.ConnSetup.TimeAvg
1526728775 L.RRC.ConnSetup.TimeMax
1526728776 L.E-RAB.Est.TimeAvg
1526728777 L.E-RAB.Est.TimeMax
Full Buffer Service Test Monitoring

The gains provided by uplink SU-MIMO decrease during a full buffer service test when the
accuracy of uplink power control is affected by uplink interference.

eRAN
l If the pre-test PRB usage is less than 50%, you are advised to enable power control by
the uplink scheduler to maintain the benefits provided by uplink SU-MIMO during the
full buffer service test. This power control function is controlled by the
SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch option of the CellAlgoSwitch.UlSchSwitch parameter.
l If the pre-test PRB usage is not less than 50% or the full buffer service test is not
performed, you are advised to disable power control by the uplink scheduler. If this
function is enabled, the values of counters listed in Table 5-31 may increase.
NOTE
PRB usage = L.ChMeas.PRB.UL.Used.Avg / Total number of uplink PRBs of the system bandwidth
Table 5-31 Counters related to uplink interference

1526728297 L.UL.Interference.Max
1526728298 L.UL.Interference.Avg
1526743751 L.UL.Interference.Min
1526743709 L.UL.Interference.LinearAvg

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 6 Parameters
6 Parameters
Table 6-1 Parameters

MO Parame MML Feature Feature Description
ter ID Comma ID Name
nd
Cell CrsPort ADD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning: Indicates the number of ports for
Num CELL 01001/ MIMO transmitting cell-specific reference signal (CRS). As
MOD TDLOF DL 4x2 defined in 3GPP specifications, this parameter can be
CELL D-00100 MIMO set to CRS_PORT_1, CRS_PORT_2, or
1 CRS_PORT_4. The value CRS_PORT_1 indicates
LST DL 4x4 that one CRS port (port 0) is configured. The value
CELL LOFD-0 MIMO
01003 CRS_PORT_2 indicates that two CRS ports (ports 0
DL 4x4 and 1) are configured. The value CRS_PORT_4
LOFD-0 MIMO indicates that four CRS ports (ports 0, 1, 2, and 3) are
01060 configured.
DL
TDLOF Flexible GUI Value Range: CRS_PORT_1(1 port),
D-00106 3D- CRS_PORT_2(2 ports), CRS_PORT_4(4 ports)
0 Beamfor Unit: None
TDLEO ming
FD-121 Actual Value Range: CRS_PORT_1, CRS_PORT_2,
615 CRS_PORT_4
Default Value: CRS_PORT_2(2 ports)

eRAN

nd
CellMi InitialMi MOD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning:

moPara moType CELLM 01001/ MIMO Indicates the MIMO transmission mode used during
Cfg IMOPA TDLOF DL 4x2 initial network access.
RACFG D-00100 MIMO
LST 1 If this parameter is set to TM2(TM2), the MIMO
DL 4x4 transmission mode used during initial network access
CELLM LOFD-0 MIMO
IMOPA 01003 is TM2.
RACFG DL 4x4
LOFD-0 MIMO If this parameter is set to ADAPTIVE(ADAPTIVE),
01060 the MIMO transmission mode used during initial
TDLOF network access is determined by the settings of the
D-00106 MimoAdaptiveSwitch and FixedMimoMode
0 parameters. If the MimoAdaptiveSwitch parameter is
set to NO_ADAPTIVE, the initial MIMO
transmission mode is determined by the setting of the
FixedMimoMode parameter. If the
MimoAdaptiveSwitch parameter is set to
OL_ADAPTIVE or OC_ADAPTIVE, the initial
MIMO transmission mode is TM3. If the
MimoAdaptiveSwitch parameter is set to
CL_ADAPTIVE, the initial MIMO transmission
mode is TM4.
This parameter applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
TDD.
GUI Value Range: TM2(TM2),
ADAPTIVE(ADAPTIVE)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: TM2, ADAPTIVE
Default Value: ADAPTIVE(ADAPTIVE)

eRAN

nd
CellMi MimoA MOD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning:

moPara daptiveS CELLM 01001/ MIMO Indicates the type of adaptive MIMO for a multi-
Cfg witch IMOPA TDLOF DL 4x2 antenna eNodeB. The values are described as follows:
RACFG D-00100 MIMO
LST 1 NO_ADAPTIVE: A fixed MIMO transmission mode
DL 4x4 is used. That is, transition between MIMO
CELLM LOFD-0 MIMO
IMOPA 01003 transmission modes is not supported.
RACFG DL 4x4
LOFD-0 MIMO OL_ADAPTIVE: The open-loop adaptive MIMO
01060 transmission mode is used. In this mode, UEs report
DL 2x2 RANK and CQI values but do not report PMI values
TDLOF MIMO
D-00106 to the eNodeB.
0 CL_ADAPTIVE: The closed-loop adaptive MIMO
TDLOF transmission mode is used. In this mode, UEs report
D-00100 RANK, CQI, and PMI values to the eNodeB.
1
OC_ADAPTIVE: UEs switch between the open-loop
and closed-loop adaptive MIMO transmission modes
automatically.
TDD.
GUI Value Range:
NO_ADAPTIVE(NO_ADAPTIVE),
OL_ADAPTIVE(OL_ADAPTIVE),
CL_ADAPTIVE(CL_ADAPTIVE),
OC_ADAPTIVE(OC_ADAPTIVE)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO_ADAPTIVE,
OL_ADAPTIVE, CL_ADAPTIVE, OC_ADAPTIVE
Default Value: NO_ADAPTIVE(NO_ADAPTIVE)

eRAN

nd
CellMi FixedMi MOD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning:

moPara moMod CELLM 01001/ MIMO Indicates the fixed MIMO transmission mode
Cfg e IMOPA TDLOF DL 4x2 configured by a multi-antenna eNodeB for UEs. This
RACFG D-00100 MIMO parameter is valid only when MimoAdaptiveSwitch is
LST 1 set to NO_ADAPTIVE. There are four values.
DL 4x4
CELLM LOFD-0 MIMO
IMOPA 01003 TM2: Transmission mode 2 is permanently applied to
RACFG DL 4x4 UEs.
LOFD-0 MIMO
01060 TM3: Transmission mode 3 is permanently applied to
DL 2x2 UEs.
TDLOF MIMO
D-00106 TM4: Transmission mode 4 is permanently applied to
0 UEs.
TDLOF
D-00100 TM6: Transmission mode 6 is permanently applied to
1 UEs.
TDD.
GUI Value Range: TM2(TM2), TM3(TM3),
TM4(TM4), TM6(TM6)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: TM2, TM3, TM4, TM6
Default Value: TM3(TM3)

eRAN

nd
CellAlg EnhMI MOD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning: Indicates the switch used to enable or
oSwitch MOSwit CELLA 01001 MIMO disable enhanced MIMO. Admitted UEs are allowed
ch LGOSW LOFD-0 DL 4x2 to enter TM9 or TM10 mode only if the TM9Switch
ITCH 01003 MIMO or TM10Switch option is selected. The
LST TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch option can be selected only
LOFD-0 DL 4x4 after the TM9Switch option is selected. If the
CELLA 01060 MIMO
LGOSW TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch option is selected, UEs
ITCH TDLAO DL 2- meeting certain conditions are allowed to adaptively
FD-001 Layer enter TM4 and TM9 mode. Otherwise, UEs are
00114 MIMO prohibited from adaptively entering TM4 and TM9
TDLAO Based mode. Enhanced MIMO does not apply to the LBBPc.
FD-081 on TM9 The TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch and TM10Switch
409 DL 4- options apply only to LTE FDD. This parameter
Layer applies only to LTE FDD. ChannelRecSwitch:
LAOFD Indicates whether to enable channel reconstruction
-111204 MIMO
Based optimization. Channel reconstruction optimization is
LEOFD- on TM9 enabled only if this option is selected. This option
111307 applies only to LTE FDD. TM9HybridPrecodingS-
Adaptiv witch: Indicates whether to enable the TM9 hybrid
e SFN/ precoding algorithm in massive MIMO scenarios. If
SDMA this option is selected, the TM9 hybrid precoding
with function is enabled to improve the beamforming
TM10 capability of closed-loop TM9 UEs. If this option is
eMIMO deselected, the TM9 hybrid precoding function is
disabled, and the beamforming capability of closed-
loop TM9 UEs remains unchanged. This option
applies only to LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: TM9Switch(TM9Switch),
TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch(TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch),
TM10Switch(TM10Switch),
ChannelRecSwitch(ChannelRecSwitch),
TM9HybridPrecodingSwitch(TM9HybridPrecodingS-
witch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: TM9Switch,
TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch, TM10Switch,
ChannelRecSwitch, TM9HybridPrecodingSwitch
Default Value: TM9Switch:Off,
TM4TM9AdaptiveSwitch:Off, TM10Switch:Off,
ChannelRecSwitch:Off, TM9HybridPrecodingS-
witch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellMB MBMSS MOD LOFD-0 eMBMS Meaning:

MSCfg witch CELLM 70220/ Phase 1 Indicates whether to enable the MBMS function.
BMSCF TDLOF based on
G D-07022 Centrali MBMSSwitch: If this option is selected, the MBMS
LST 0 zed function is enabled, and the cell supports the MBMS
CELLM MCE service. If this option is deselected, the MBMS
BMSCF Architec function is disabled. This parameter applies only to
G ture LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: MBMSSwitch(MBMSSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: MBMSSwitch
Default Value: MBMSSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg DlSchS MOD LOFD-1 Traffic Meaning:

oSwitch witch CELLA 10205/ Model Indicates whether to enable downlink scheduling
LGOSW TDLOF Based algorithms in a cell. This parameter includes the
ITCH D-11022 Perform following options:
LST 7 ance
CELLA LOFD-0 Optimiz FreqSelSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
LGOSW 01016/ ation frequency-selective scheduling. If this option is
ITCH TDLOF VoIP selected, data is transmitted on the frequency band of
D-00101 Semi- high channel quality. This option applies only to LTE
6 persisten FDD and LTE TDD.
LBFD-0 t
SpsSchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable semi-
0101502 Scheduli
persistent scheduling during talk spurts of VoLTE
/ ng
services. If this option is selected, semi-persistent
TDLBF Dynami scheduling is applied during talk spurts of VoLTE
D-00101 c services. If this option is deselected, dynamic
502 Scheduli scheduling is applied during talk spurts of VoLTE
ng services. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LOFD-0
01109/ DL LTE TDD.
TDLOF Non-
MBSFNShutDownSwitch: Indicates whether to
D-00110 GBR
enable Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single
9 Packet
Frequency Network (MBSFN) subframe shutdown. If
Bundlin
LOFD-0 this option is selected, MBSFN subframe shutdown is
g
01070/ applied. If this option is deselected, MBSFN subframe
TDLOF Symbol shutdown is not applied. This option takes effect only
D-00107 Power if the SymbolShutdownSwitch option of the
0 Saving PowerSaveSwitch parameter is selected. If the
TDLOF Scheduli MBSFNShutDownSwitch option is selected, the
D-07022 ng setting of the switch for mapping SIBs to SI messages
2/ Based becomes invalid. If the MBSFNShutDownSwitch
LOFD-1 on Max option is deselected, the setting of the switch for
31213 Bit Rate mapping SIBs to SI messages becomes valid. The
MBSFNShutDownSwitch option applies only to LTE-
LBFD-0 Basic
only base stations. This option applies only to LTE
02025/ Scheduli
FDD and LTE TDD.
TDLBF ng
D-00202 Aperiodi NonGbrBundlingSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
5 c CQI downlink non-GBR packet bundling. If this option is
LBFD-0 Reportin selected, delay of non-GBR services can be controlled
02031/ g in non-congestion scenarios. If this option is
TDLBF MBR>G deselected, delay of non-GBR services cannot be
D-00203 BR controlled. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
1 Configu LTE TDD.
LBFD-0 ration EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch: Indicates whether to

70102/ Enhance enable enhanced aperiodic channel quality indicator
TDLBF d DL (CQI) reporting. If this option is selected, the eNodeB
D-07010 Frequen triggers aperiodic CQI reporting for a UE based on
2 cy downlink services of the UE and the interval at which

eRAN

nd
LBFD-0 Selectiv the UE sends periodic CQI reports. If this option is

60103 e deselected, UEs under non-frequency-selective
LOFD-0 Scheduli scheduling do not trigger aperiodic CQI reporting
81218 ng based on downlink services and trigger an aperiodic
Enhance CQI reporting if no valid periodic CQI reports are sent
LTROF in eight consecutive periodic CQI reporting periods.
D-11120 d
Extende This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
4/
TDLOF d QCI DlMbrCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
D-12110 MCPTT downlink scheduling based on the maximum bit rate
6 Voice (MBR) and guaranteed bit rate (GBR) on GBR
TDLBF Manage bearers. If this option is selected, the eNodeB
D-00200 ment performs downlink scheduling on GBR bearers based
5 DL on the MBR and GBR. If this option is deselected, the
Asynchr eNodeB performs downlink scheduling on GBR
LBFD-0 bearers based on the GBR only. This option applies
60101 onous
HARQ only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
LBFD-0
60103/ Optimiz MbrDlSchSwitch: Indicates whether the eNodeB
TDLBF ation of performs downlink scheduling based on MBR. If this
D-08010 CQI option is selected, the eNodeB prioritizes UEs based
2 Reportin on the MBRs during downlink scheduling. This
g parameter applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
LEOFD-
111305 Enhance UeAmbrDlSchSwitch: Indicates whether the eNodeB
d DL performs downlink scheduling based on per UE
LEOFD- Frequen aggregate maximum bit rates (UE-AMBRs). If this
111307 cy option is selected, the eNodeB prioritizes UEs based
TDLOF Selectiv on the UE-AMBRs during downlink scheduling. This
D-12110 e option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
5 Scheduli
ng EpfEnhancedSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
enhanced proportional fair (EPF) enhancement for
Virtual
scheduling. EPF enhancement for scheduling is
4T4R
enabled only if this option is selected. This option
eMIMO applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
RRC AperiodicCqiTrigOptSwitch: Indicates whether to
and optimize triggering of aperiodic CQI reporting. If this
DRX option is selected, a UE performing initial access
Policy triggers aperiodic CQI reporting based on related
for trigger conditions after the DLMAC instance has been
Public established for 200 ms and the eNodeB receives
Safety MSG5. Consider that aperiodic CQI reporting is
triggered by invalid CQI reports in eight consecutive
CQI reporting periods. If cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) on aperiodic CQI reports fails, aperiodic CQI
reporting is not repeatedly triggered when DRX is
enabled; or aperiodic CQI reporting is triggered after
eight TTIs when DRX is disabled. If this option is
deselected, a UE performing initial access triggers

eRAN

nd
aperiodic CQI reporting based on related trigger

conditions after the DLMAC instance has been
established for 200 ms. Consider that aperiodic CQI
reporting is triggered by invalid CQI reports in eight
consecutive CQI reporting periods. If CRC on
aperiodic CQI reports fails, aperiodic CQI reporting is
triggered after eight TTIs, regardless of the DRX
status. This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
TDD.
VoipTbsBasedMcsSelSwitch: Indicates whether the
modulation and coding scheme (MCS) index is
selected based on the transport block size (TBS) in
downlink scheduling for VoLTE services. The MCS
index is selected based on the TBS in downlink
dynamic scheduling for VoLTE services only if this
option is selected. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
PagingInterfRandSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
interference randomization for paging messages. If
this option is selected, interference randomization is
enabled for paging messages. This option applies only
to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
DlSingleUsrMcsOptSwitch: Indicates conditions for
lowering the MCS index for a single UE. If this option
is selected, the MCS index can be lowered for a UE if
the UE is the only UE to be scheduled in a
transmission time interval (TTI). If this option is
deselected, the MCS index can be lowered for a UE if
the threshold for the function of lowering the MCS
index to increase the number of RBs is reached and
the UE is the only UE to be scheduled in a TTI. This
option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
UeSigMcsEnhanceSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable MCS optimization for UE signaling. If this
option is selected, MCS optimization for UE signaling
is enabled. For LTE FDD, the MCS index for UE
signaling is the same as the MCS index for data. For
LTE TDD, the MCS index for UE signaling is lowered
based on the MCS index for data. If this option is
deselected, a fixed low MCS index is used for UE
signaling. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
SubframeSchDiffSwitch: For TDD cells, this option
indicates whether to perform scheduling in subframes
3 and 8 based on the policy of increasing the number
of UEs scheduled in the uplink when uplink-downlink

eRAN

nd
configuration 2 is used. If this option is selected,

scheduling in subframes 3 and 8 is performed based
on the policy of increasing the number of UEs
scheduled in the uplink when uplink-downlink
configuration 2 is used. If this option is deselected, the
scheduling policy used in subframes 3 and 8 is the
same as that used in other downlink subframes when
uplink-downlink configuration 2 is used. For NB-IoT
cells, this option indicates whether to enable
scheduling priority optimization. If this option is
deselected, the scheduling priority of downlink
services is higher than that of uplink services for UEs
for which control plane CIoT EPS optimization is
used. If this option is selected, the scheduling priority
of downlink services is the same as that of uplink
services for UEs for which control plane CIoT EPS
optimization is used. This option applies only to LTE
TDD and NB-IoT.
TailPackagePriSchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
scheduling of downlink connected tail packages in the
bearer. If this option is selected, the connected tail
package is scheduled preferentially in the next TTI,
which reduces the delay and increases the
transmission rate. If this option is deselected, the
scheduling policy of the connected tail package is the
same as other downlink subframes. This option
SIB1InterfRandSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
SIB1 interference randomization. If this option is
selected, interference randomization is enabled for
SIB1. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
FreqSelJudgeIgnorDopplerSwitch: Indicates whether
to ignore Doppler conditions. If this option is selected,
Doppler conditions are ignored during frequency
selective channel determination. If this option is
deselected, Doppler conditions are considered during
frequency selective channel determination. This
parameter applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable semi-persistent scheduling during talk spurts of
PTT services with standardized QCI 65, standardized
QCI 66, or an enhanced extended QCI. If this option
is selected, semi-persistent scheduling is applied. If
this option is deselected, dynamic scheduling is
applied. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.

eRAN

nd
DlVoipBundlingSwitch: Indicates whether to enable

active packet bundling for downlink VoLTE services.
Active packet bundling is enabled for downlink
VoLTE services only if this option is selected. If this
option is selected, PDCCH resources can be saved for
downlink data services or uplink services, thereby
increasing the VoLTE capacity for VoLTE services or
increasing the throughput of data services in mixed
service scenarios. However, the delay in VoLTE voice
packet scheduling will increase in the downlink and
MOSs may decrease. You are advised to deselect this
option if you prefer VoLTE performance and do not
expect MOS reduction. This option applies only to
LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
DlPacketLenAwareSchSw: Indicates whether to
enable packet length awareness performance
optimization in the downlink. Packet length awareness
performance optimization is enabled in the downlink
only if this option is selected. This option applies only
RLCArqFeedbackEnhancedSwitch: Indicates whether
to modify HARQ feedback results based on RLC
status reports when uplink-downlink configuration 2
is used. If this option is selected, the eNodeB modifies
HARQ feedback results based on RLC status reports
after receiving the reports. This prevents unnecessary
HARQ retransmissions. This option applies only to
LTE TDD.
PaReconfigOptSwitch: Indicates whether to enable PA
reconfiguration optimization. The optimization is
enabled when this option is selected. This option
applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
RankRapidRptSwitch: Indicates whether to enable fast
rank reporting. If this option is selected, an aperiodic
CQI reporting is immediately triggered after
successful network access. If this option is deselected,
an aperiodic CQI reporting is not immediately
triggered after successful network access. This option
DlRLCStateReportSchDelaySw: Indicates whether to
enable optimization on the delay-based scheduling of
downlink RLC status reports. The optimization is
enabled when this option is selected. This option
SmallPktMcsSelectAlgoSw: Indicates whether to
enable MCS selection for small packets. If this option

eRAN

nd
is selected, the scheduler selects an MCS with a lower

index based on the amount of data to be initially
transmitted and the allocated TBS in each TTI on
condition that the allocated TB can carry the data. The
function is enabled only if this option is selected. This
SRB0SplitSchSw: Indicates whether to enable

separate scheduling of SRB0 and contention
resolution MCE. If this option is selected, SRB0 and
contention resolution MCE are separately scheduled.
This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
BfUserPairPriorSwitch: Indicates whether to

preferentially allocate resources to paired
beamforming UEs for UE pairing features such as MU
beamforming and D-MIMO. If this option is selected,
the eNodeB preferentially allocates resources to
paired beamforming UEs for UE pairing features such
as MU beamforming and D-MIMO. This option
HarqAllocOptSwitch: Indicates whether to optimize

the allocation of HARQ processes. If this option is
selected, the downlink UE rate increases. This option
takes effect only when D-MIMO or massive MIMO is
enabled. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
Pusch32Switch: Indicates whether to enable the

PUSCH 3-2 feedback mode. If this option is selected,
UEs that support the PUSCH 3-2 feedback mode use
this mode to aperiodically report CQIs. If this option
is deselected, the mode cannot be used. This option
applies only to LTE FDD.
DlPreciseAmbrCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to

enable precise downlink AMBR control. If this option
is selected, a more accurate optimization algorithm
applies to the AMBR control, which achieves more
accurate AMBR control. If this option is deselected,
the original AMBR control algorithm is used. This
GUI Value Range: FreqSelSwitch(FreqSelSwitch),
SpsSchSwitch(SpsSchSwitch),
MBSFNShutDownSwitch(MBSFNShutDownSwitch),
NonGbrBundlingSwitch(NonGbrBundlingSwitch),
EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch(EnAperiodicCqiRptS-
witch), DlMbrCtrlSwitch(DlMbrCtrlSwitch),
MbrDlSchSwitch(MbrDlSchSwitch),
UeAmbrDlSchSwitch(UeAmbrDlSchSwitch),

eRAN

nd
EpfEnhancedSwitch(EpfEnhancedSwitch),
AperiodicCqiTrigOptSwitch(AperiodicCqiTrigOptS-
witch), VoipTbsBasedMcsSelS-
witch(VoipTbsBasedMcsSelSwitch),
PagingInterfRandSwitch(PagingInterfRandSwitch),
DlSingleUsrMcsOptSwitch(DlSingleUsrMcsOptS-
witch), SubframeSchDiffSwitch(SubframeSchDiffS-
witch), TailPackagePriSchS-
witch(TailPackagePriSchSwitch),
UeSigMcsEnhanceSwitch(UeSigMcsEnhanceSwitch),
FreqSelJudgeIgnorDopplerSwitch(FreqSelJudgeIgnor-
DopplerSwitch),
SIB1InterfRandSwitch(SIB1InterfRandSwitch),
EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch(EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch),
DlVoipBundlingSwitch(DlVoipBundlingSwitch),
DlPacketLenAwareSchSw(DlPacketLenAwar-
eSchSw), RLCArqFeedbackEnhanced-
Switch(RLCArqFeedbackEnhancedSwitch),
PaReconfigOptSwitch(PaReconfigOptSwitch),
RankRapidRptSwitch(RankRapidRptSwitch),
DlRLCStateReportSchDe-
laySw(DlRLCStateReportSchDelaySw),
SmallPktMcsSelectAlgoSw(SmallPktMcsSelectAl-
goSw), SRB0SplitSchSw(SRB0SplitSchSw),
BfUserPairPriorSwitch(BfUserPairPriorSwitch),
HarqAllocOptSwitch(HarqAllocOptSwitch),
Pusch32Switch(Pusch32Switch),
DlPreciseAmbrCtrlSwitch(DlPreciseAmbrCtrlSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: FreqSelSwitch, SpsSchSwitch,
MBSFNShutDownSwitch, NonGbrBundlingSwitch,
EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch, DlMbrCtrlSwitch,
MbrDlSchSwitch, UeAmbrDlSchSwitch,
EpfEnhancedSwitch, AperiodicCqiTrigOptSwitch,
VoipTbsBasedMcsSelSwitch, PagingInterfRand-
Switch, DlSingleUsrMcsOptSwitch,
SubframeSchDiffSwitch, TailPackagePriSchSwitch,
UeSigMcsEnhanceSwitch, FreqSelJudgeIgnorDop-
plerSwitch, SIB1InterfRandSwitch,
EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch, DlVoipBundlingSwitch,
DlPacketLenAwareSchSw, RLCArqFeedbackEnhan-
cedSwitch, PaReconfigOptSwitch,
RankRapidRptSwitch, DlRLCStateReportSchDe-
laySw, SmallPktMcsSelectAlgoSw, SRB0SplitSchSw,
BfUserPairPriorSwitch, HarqAllocOptSwitch,
Pusch32Switch, DlPreciseAmbrCtrlSwitch
Default Value: FreqSelSwitch:Off, SpsSchSwitch:Off,
MBSFNShutDownSwitch:Off, NonGbrBundlingS-

eRAN

nd
witch:Off, EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch:Off,
DlMbrCtrlSwitch:Off, MbrDlSchSwitch:Off,
UeAmbrDlSchSwitch:Off, EpfEnhancedSwitch:Off,
AperiodicCqiTrigOptSwitch:On, VoipTbsBasedMcs-
SelSwitch:On, PagingInterfRandSwitch:Off,
DlSingleUsrMcsOptSwitch:Off, SubframeSchDiffS-
witch:Off, TailPackagePriSchSwitch:Off,
UeSigMcsEnhanceSwitch:Off, FreqSelJudgeIgnor-
DopplerSwitch:Off, SIB1InterfRandSwitch:On,
EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch:Off, DlVoipBundlingS-
witch:Off, DlPacketLenAwareSchSw:Off,
RLCArqFeedbackEnhancedSwitch:Off,
PaReconfigOptSwitch:Off, RankRapidRptSwitch:Off,
DlRLCStateReportSchDelaySw:Off,
SmallPktMcsSelectAlgoSw:Off,
SRB0SplitSchSw:Off, BfUserPairPriorSwitch:Off,
HarqAllocOptSwitch:Off, Pusch32Switch:Off,
DlPreciseAmbrCtrlSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
ENodeB LcsSwit MOD LOFD-0 LoCatio Meaning:

AlgoSwi ch ENODE 01047/ n Indicates whether to enable location service (LCS)
tch BALGO TDLOF Services functions.
SWITC D-00104 (LCS)
H 7 OtdoaSwitch: If this option is selected, OTDOA-based
LST positioning is enabled. If this option is deselected,
ENODE OTDOA-based positioning is disabled. This option
BALGO applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
SWITC EcidInterFreqMeasSwitch: If this option is selected,
H ECID-based RSRP and RSRQ measurement for inter-
frequency neighboring cells is enabled. If this option
is deselected, ECID-based RSRP and RSRQ
measurement for inter-frequency neighboring cells is
disabled. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
OTDOAInterFreqRSTDMeasSwitch: If this option is
selected, OTDOA-based inter-frequency RSTD
measurement is enabled. If this option is deselected,
OTDOA-based inter-frequency RSTD measurement is
LTE TDD.
EmtcEcidSwitch: If this option is selected, ECID-
based positioning is enabled for eMTC UEs. If this
option is disabled, ECID-based positioning is disabled
for eMTC UEs. This option applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
EcidOptSwitch: If this option is selected, ECID-based
positioning optimization is enabled, increasing
measurement accuracy for UE positioning. If this
option is deselected, ECID-based positioning
optimization is disabled. This option applies only to
LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: OtdoaSwitch(OTDOA switch),
EcidInterFreqMeasSwitch(EcidInterFreqMeasSwitch),
OTDOAInterFreqRSTDMeasS-
witch(OTDOAInterFreqRSTDMeasSwitch),
EmtcEcidSwitch(EmtcEcidSwitch),
EcidOptSwitch(EcidOptSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OtdoaSwitch,
EcidInterFreqMeasSwitch, OTDOAInterFreqRSTD-
MeasSwitch, EmtcEcidSwitch, EcidOptSwitch
Default Value: OtdoaSwitch:Off,
EcidInterFreqMeasSwitch:Off,

eRAN

nd
OTDOAInterFreqRSTDMeasSwitch:Off,
EmtcEcidSwitch:Off, EcidOptSwitch:Off
CellAlg BfAlgoS MOD TDLOF Single Meaning:

oSwitch witch CELLA D-00104 Streami BfSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
LGOSW 9 ng beamforming algorithm. If this option is selected, the
ITCH TDLOF Beamfor beamforming algorithm is enabled for all UEs in a
LST D-00106 ming cell. If this option is deselected, the beamforming
CELLA 1 Dual algorithm is disabled for all UEs in the cell. This
LGOSW TDLOF Streami option is deselected by default. If a cell supporting
ITCH D-13020 ng beamforming is established, manually select this
2 Beamfor option. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
ming
TDLEO LongSrsPeriodBfSwitch: Indicates whether to perform
FD-121 WTTx beamforming for UEs with the SRS period longer than
615 Turbo 40 ms in non-massive MIMO cells. If this option is
Beamfor selected, the eNodeB can perform beamforming for
ming UEs with the SRS period longer than 40 ms in non-
DL massive MIMO cells. If this option is deselected, the
Flexible eNodeB cannot perform beamforming for such UEs.
3D- This option takes effect only when the beamforming
Beamfor algorithm is enabled. This option applies only to LTE
ming TDD.
AntSelEnhanceBfSwitch: Indicates whether four
antennas can send SRSs in turn. If this option is
selected, four antennas can send SRSs in turn. If this
option is deselected, four antennas cannot send SRSs
in turn. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: BfSwitch(BfSwitch),
LongSrsPeriodBfSwitch(LongSrsPeriodBfSwitch),
AntSelEnhanceBfSwitch(AntSelEnhanceBfSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: BfSwitch, LongSrsPeriodBfS-
witch, AntSelEnhanceBfSwitch
Default Value: BfSwitch:Off, LongSrsPeriodBfS-
witch:Off, AntSelEnhanceBfSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellBfM BfMimo MOD TDLOF DL 2x2 Meaning:

imoPara Adaptiv CELLB D-00100 MIMO Indicates the type of adaptive selection between
Cfg eSwitch FMIMO 1 DL 4x4 beamforming and MIMO for a multi-antenna eNodeB.
PARAC TDLOF MIMO The values are described as follows:
FG D-00106 Single NO_ADAPTIVE: A fixed beamforming or MIMO
LST 0 Streami
CELLB transmission mode is used. That is, transmission mode
TDLOF ng switching is not supported.
FMIMO D-00104 Beamfor
PARAC 9 ming TxD_BF_ADAPTIVE: The transmission mode
FG changes adaptively between TM2 and TM7 or
TDLOF Dual
D-00106 Streami between TM2 and TM8, depending on the 3GPP
1 ng release with which UEs comply.
TDLAO Beamfor MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE: The transmission mode

FD-001 ming changes adaptively among TM2, TM3, and TM7,
00115 Beamfor among TM2, TM3, and TM8, or among TM2, TM3,
TDLAO ming in TM8, and TM9, depending on the 3GPP release with
FD-081 Scell which UEs comply. The TM9Switch option must be
409 DL 4- selected if the TM9 mode is required. This parameter
Layer applies only to LTE TDD.
MIMO GUI Value Range:
Based NO_ADAPTIVE(NO_ADAPTIVE),
on TM9 TxD_BF_ADAPTIVE(TxD_BF_ADAPTIVE),
MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE(MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO_ADAPTIVE,
TxD_BF_ADAPTIVE, MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE
Default Value:
MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE(MIMO_BF_ADAPTIVE)

eRAN

nd
Cell CrsPort ADD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning: Indicates the mapping between a cell-
Map CELL 01001/ MIMO specific reference signal (CRS) port and a transmit
MOD TDLOF DL 4x2 (TX) channel in an RRU. In cells with one or two TX
CELL D-00100 MIMO channels, this parameter cannot be set. In cells with
1 four or eight TX channels, this parameter can be set.
LST DL 4x4 As defined in 3GPP specifications, the CrsPortNum
CELL LOFD-0 MIMO
01003 parameter can be set to CRS_PORT_1,
DL 4x4 CRS_PORT_2, or CRS_PORT_4. The value
LOFD-0 MIMO CRS_PORT_1 indicates that one CRS port (port 0) is
01060 configured. The value CRS_PORT_2 indicates that
DL 4-
TDLOF Antenna two CRS ports (ports 0 and 1) are configured. The
D-00106 Transmi value CRS_PORT_4 indicates that four CRS ports
0 t (ports 0, 1, 2 and 3). In values of this parameter,
MLBFD Diversit mTnP indicates that the number of TX channels
-121002 y configured for a cell is "m" and the number of CRS
40 ports is "n". The parameter value 4TnP_abcd indicates
that reference signals transmitted over CRS ports a, b,
c, and d are mapped to TX channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 in
an RRU, respectively (The TX channel number here is
for reference only, and is determined based on the
R0A to R0D, or others). The parameter value
8TnP_abcdefgh indicates that reference signals
transmitted over CRS ports a to h are mapped to TX
channels 1 to 8 in an RRU, respectively. Duplicate
numbers of abcd or abcdefgh indicate that virtual
antenna mapping (VAM) is applied, that is, the
reference signals transmitted over the CRS port are
mapped to corresponding TX channels. The parameter
value NOT_CFG indicates that the mapping between
a CRS port and a TX channel in an RRU is not
configured, and CRS ports are mapped to TX channels
in an RRU in a default manner. In TDD cells, "n" in
mTnP must be equal to the CrsPortNum parameter
value. For cells established on LBBPc boards, the
parameter value NOT_CFG takes effect regardless of
the actual parameter setting. This parameter applies
only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: NOT_CFG(Not configure),
4T4P_0213(4T4P_0213), 4T4P_0231(4T4P_0231),
4T4P_0123(4T4P_0123), 4T4P_0132(4T4P_0132),
4T4P_0312(4T4P_0312), 4T4P_0321(4T4P_0321),
4T2P_0011(4T2P_0011), 4T2P_0101(4T2P_0101),
4T2P_0110(4T2P_0110),
8T2P_00001111(8T2P_00001111),
8T2P_00110011(8T2P_00110011),
8T2P_01010101(8T2P_01010101),
8T4P_00112233(8T4P_00112233),
8T4P_01230123(8T4P_01230123)

eRAN

nd
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NOT_CFG, 4T4P_0213,
4T4P_0231, 4T4P_0123, 4T4P_0132, 4T4P_0312,
4T4P_0321, 4T2P_0011, 4T2P_0101, 4T2P_0110,
8T2P_00001111, 8T2P_00110011, 8T2P_01010101,
8T4P_00112233, 8T4P_01230123
Default Value: NOT_CFG(Not configure)

eRAN

nd
CellAlg EmimoS MOD LEOFD- Virtual Meaning:

oSwitch witch CELLA 111305 4T4R Indicates whether to enable eMIMO-related
LGOSW LEOFD- eMIMO algorithms.
ITCH 111307
LST Virtual4T4RSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
CELLA virtual 4T4R function. This option applies only to
LGOSW FDD. The function is enabled only if this option is
ITCH selected.
EmimoMuMimoSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
the eMIMO MU-MIMO function. This option applies
only to FDD. The function is enabled only if this
option is selected.
EmimoCpsSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
coordinated pilot scheduling for eMIMO. This option
applies only to FDD. The function is enabled only if
this option is selected. When this option is selected,
the eNodeB determines the pilot transmission mode
based on inter-cell load status.
EmimoFbaSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
following functions: fast beam alignment for eMIMO
and extending UE rank reporting period in non-high-
speed-railway scenarios when the CQI reporting
period is adaptively changed to 40 ms. The preceding
two functions are enabled only if this option is
selected. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
New4TCodebookSwitch: Indicates whether to use the
new 4T codebook. The new 4T codebook can be used
for UEs that support the new 4T codebook only if this
FDD.
4TxTM9MuMimoSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
the 4TX TM9 MU-MIMO function. This option
applies only to FDD. The function is enabled only if
this option is selected.
DrxSimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch: Indicates whether
to allow UEs in DRX mode to send CQI and ACK/
NACK simultaneously on the PUCCH when
SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch is set to ON and
CqiMask is set to OFF. This option takes effect when
the number of configured downlink transmit antennas
of the cell is greater than two. If this option is
selected, UEs in DRX mode can send CQI and ACK/
NACK simultaneously on the PUCCH when
SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch is set to ON and
CqiMask is set to OFF. If this option is deselected, the

eRAN

nd
settings of the SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch and

CqiMask parameters determine whether to allow UEs
in DRX mode to send CQI and ACK/NACK
simultaneously on the PUCCH.
PreciseAmcSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
precise AMC. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
If this option is selected, target IBLERs are adjusted
based on the interference level information exchanged
with neighboring cells. If this option is deselected, the
function does not take effect.
EmimoCsiEnhanceSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable CSI reporting enhancement. If this option is
selected, CSI reporting enhancement for eMIMO is
enabled. Function 1: A shorter CSI reporting period
can be set for UEs running large-packet services and
fast beam alignment does not take effect. This
function applies only to LTE FDD. If this option is
deselected, CSI reporting enhancement for eMIMO is
disabled.
PUSCH12Switch: Indicates whether to enable the
PUSCH 1-2 feedback mode. This option applies only
to LTE FDD. If this option is selected, UEs that
support reporting on PUSCH 1-2 use this mode to
aperiodically report CQIs. If this option is deselected,
the mode cannot be used.
GUI Value Range:
Virtual4T4RSwitch(Virtual4T4RSwitch),
EmimoMuMimoSwitch(EmimoMuMimoSwitch),
EmimoCpsSwitch(EmimoCpsSwitch),
EmimoFbaSwitch(EmimoFbaSwitch),
New4TCodebookSwitch(New4TCodebookSwitch),
4TxTM9MuMimoSwitch(4TxTM9MuMimoSwitch),
DrxSimulAckNackAndCqiS-
witch(DrxSimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch),
PreciseAmcSwitch(PreciseAmcSwitch),
EmimoCsiEnhanceSwitch(EmimoCsiEnhanceSwitch),
PUSCH12Switch(PUSCH12Switch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Virtual4T4RSwitch,
EmimoMuMimoSwitch, EmimoCpsSwitch,
EmimoFbaSwitch, New4TCodebookSwitch,
4TxTM9MuMimoSwitch, DrxSimulAckNackAndC-
qiSwitch, PreciseAmcSwitch, EmimoCsiEnhanceS-
witch, PUSCH12Switch
Default Value: Virtual4T4RSwitch:Off,
EmimoMuMimoSwitch:Off, EmimoCpsSwitch:Off,

eRAN

nd
EmimoFbaSwitch:Off, New4TCodebookSwitch:Off,
4TxTM9MuMimoSwitch:Off, DrxSimulAckNack-
AndCqiSwitch:Off, PreciseAmcSwitch:Off,
EmimoCsiEnhanceSwitch:Off, PUSCH12Switch:Off
Cell DlCycli ADD LBFD-0 Normal Meaning: Indicates the length of the DL cyclic prefix
cPrefix CELL 0100401 CP of a cell. A DL cyclic prefix can be a common or
MOD / Extende extended cyclic prefix. An extended cyclic prefix is
CELL TDLBF d CP generally used in a complex environment with a
D-00100 strong multi-path effect and long delay. In a cell, the
LST 401 eMTC UL cyclic prefix length can be different from the DL
CELL Introduc one. In addition, the UL or DL cyclic prefix length of
LOFD-0 tion
01031/ a cell must be the same as that of the cell using the
TDLOF same BBP. For details, see 3GPP TS 36.211.
D-00103 GUI Value Range: NORMAL_CP(Normal),
1 EXTENDED_CP(Extended)
TDLEO Unit: None
FD-121 Actual Value Range: NORMAL_CP,
611 EXTENDED_CP
Default Value: NORMAL_CP(Normal)
Cell UlCycli ADD LBFD-0 Normal Meaning: Indicates the UL cyclic prefix length of a
cPrefix CELL 0100401 CP cell. A cyclic prefix can be a common or extended
MOD / Extende cyclic prefix. An extended cyclic prefix is generally
CELL TDLBF d CP used in a complex environment with a strong multi-
D-00100 path effect and long delay. In a cell, the UL cyclic
LST 401 Broadca prefix length can be different from the DL one. In
CELL st of addition, the UL or DL cyclic prefix length of a cell
LOFD-0 system
01031/ must be the same as that of the cell using the same
informat BBP. For details, see 3GPP TS 36.211.
TDLOF ion
D-00103 GUI Value Range: NORMAL_CP(Normal),
1 EXTENDED_CP(Extended)
LBFD-0 Unit: None
02009/ Actual Value Range: NORMAL_CP,
TDLBF EXTENDED_CP
D-00200
9/ Default Value: NORMAL_CP(Normal)
MLBFD
-120002
29

eRAN

nd
Cell MultiRr ADD LOFD-0 SFN Meaning: Indicates whether to enable or disable the
uCellFla CELL 03029/ Adaptiv multi-RRU cell feature.
g MOD TDLOF e SFN/ GUI Value Range: BOOLEAN_FALSE(False),
CELL D-00107 SDMA BOOLEAN_TRUE(True)
5
LST Inter- Unit: None
CELL TDLOF BBP
D-00200 Actual Value Range: BOOLEAN_FALSE,
SFN BOOLEAN_TRUE
8
Inter- Default Value: BOOLEAN_FALSE(False)
TDLOF eNodeB
D-00109 SFN
8 Based
TDLOF on
D-00108 Coordin
0 ated
TDLOF eNodeB
D-00108 Inter-
1 BBP
TDLOF Adaptiv
D-00108 e SFN/
2 SDMA
Inter-
eNodeB
Adaptiv
e SFN/
SDMA
Based
on
Coordin
ated
eNodeB

eRAN

nd
GlobalP CrsAntP DSP None None Meaning: Indicates the CRS antenna port mapping
rocSwitc ortOptD CRSPO optimization detection result of the cell. This
h etResult RTOPT parameter applies only to LTE FDD.
DET GUI Value Range: NA(NA), RUNNING(RUNNING),
FAILURE(FAILURE), COMPLETE(COMPLETE),
SCENARIO_NOT_SUPPORTED(SCENARIO_NOT
_SUPPORTED),
FAILURE_HIGHER_PRIORITY_TASK_DISRUPTI
ON(FAILURE_HIGHER_PRIORITY_TASK_DISRU
PTION),
FAILURE_TIMEOUT(FAILURE_TIMEOUT)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NA, RUNNING, FAILURE,
COMPLETE, SCENARIO_NOT_SUPPORTED,
FAILURE_HIGHER_PRIORITY_TASK_DISRUPTI
ON, FAILURE_TIMEOUT
Default Value: None
CellDlsc MaxMi MOD LOFD-0 DL 2x2 Meaning: Indicates the maximum number of layers
hAlgo moRank CELLD 01001/ MIMO (the rank) in the implementation of multiple-input
Para LSCHA TDLOF DL 4x2 multiple-output (MIMO) in DL scheduling. This
LGO D-00100 MIMO parameter applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
LST 1 GUI Value Range: SW_MAX_SM_RANK_1(Rank1),
DL 4x4
CELLD LOFD-0 MIMO SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2(Rank2),
LSCHA 01003 SW_MAX_SM_RANK_4(Rank4),
LGO DL 4x4 SW_MAX_SM_RANK_8(Rank8)
LOFD-0 MIMO
01060 Unit: None
DL 8x8
TDLOF MIMO Actual Value Range: SW_MAX_SM_RANK_1,
D-00106 (Trial) SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2,
0 SW_MAX_SM_RANK_4, SW_MAX_SM_RANK_8
TDLAO Default Value: SW_MAX_SM_RANK_2(Rank2)
FD-130
490
Cell TxRxM ADD None None Meaning: Indicates the transmission and reception
ode CELL mode of the cell.
MOD GUI Value Range: 1T1R, 1T2R, 2T2R, 2T4R, 4T4R,
CELL 8T8R, 2T8R, 4T8R, 64T64R, 32T32R
LST Unit: None
CELL Actual Value Range: 1T1R, 1T2R, 2T2R, 2T4R,
4T4R, 8T8R, 2T8R, 4T8R, 64T64R, 32T32R
Default Value: None

eRAN

nd
ENodeB Compati MOD LBFD-0 Coverag Meaning:

AlgoSwi bilityCtr ENODE 0201802 e Based Indicates whether to enable compatibility solutions,
tch lSwitch BALGO / Inter- based on which the eNodeB determines whether to
SWITC TDLBF frequenc handle compatibility issues. This parameter includes
H D-00201 y the following options: UECapRprtAbnormalCtrlS-
LST 802 Handov witch: If this option is selected, the eNodeB handles
ENODE LBFD-0 er compatibility issues of UEs that cannot report their
BALGO 0201805 Service capabilities. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
SWITC / Based LTE TDD.
H TDLBF Inter-
ApCqiRptAbnormalCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to
D-00201 frequenc
apply a compatibility solution to abnormal aperiodic
805 y
channel quality indicator (CQI) reporting. If this
LBFD-0 Handov
option is selected, the compatibility solution takes
02031/ er
effect. The configuration IEs related to aperiodic CQI
TDLBF Aperiodi reporting are always included in RRC Connection
D-00203 c CQI Reconfiguration messages used to reconfigure CQIs.
1 Reportin If this option is deselected, the compatibility solution
g does not take effect. The configuration IEs related to
LOFD-0
01019/ PS Inter- aperiodic CQI reporting are not included in RRC
TDLOF RAT Connection Reconfiguration messages used to
D-00101 Mobility reconfigure CQIs if the IEs remain unchanged. This
9 between option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
E-
LOFD-0 UeInterRatMeasCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether the
UTRAN
01020/ eNodeB checks the QCI-specific inter-RAT handover
and
TDLOF policies when evaluating an inter-RAT handover. This
UTRAN
D-00102 function does not allow the eNodeB to deliver inter-
0 PS Inter- RAT measurement configurations to some special UEs
RAT anymore and applies to the following types of inter-
LAOFD
Mobility RAT handovers: coverage-based handover, distance-
-001002
between based handover, uplink-quality-based handover,
/
E- service-based handover, and SPID-specific handover
TDLAO
UTRAN back to the HPLMN. If this option is selected, the
FD-001
and eNodeB determines whether to deliver inter-RAT
002
GERAN A1/A2, blind A1/A2, and inter-RAT B1/B2
LBFD-0
Carrier measurement configurations to the UE for a
02008/
Aggrega measurement-based or blind inter-RAT handover
TDLBF
tion for based on the setting of the NoHoFlag parameters in
D-00200
Downlin the InterRatPolicyCfgGroup MO for QCIs of services
8
k 2CC running on the UE. If this option is deselected, the
LOFD-0 in eNodeB does not perform the evaluation based on the
01060 40MHz values of the NoHoFlag parameters in the
TDLOF Radio InterRatPolicyCfgGroup MO.
D-00106 Bearer VoipExProtSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
0 Manage service-request-based inter-frequency handover
LOFD-0 ment protection when a VoLTE exception occurs. If this
01001/ DL 4x4 option is selected and the eNodeB does not support
TDLOF MIMO VoLTE, the eNodeB can set up bearers for QCI-1

eRAN

nd
D-00100 DL 4x4 services and other services when both of the following
1 MIMO conditions are met: (1) The EPC delivers information
LOFD-0 DL 2x2 about bearers with QCI 1 and other QCIs; (2) The UE
01003 MIMO exits the idle mode. After the QCI-1 service bearers
are set up, the UE is handed over to an inter-frequency
TDLAO DL 4x2 cell. This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
FD-001 MIMO TDD.
00114 DL 2-
TDLAO Layer ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to
FD-081 MIMO enable a workaround of problems that may occur
409 Based when aperiodic CQI reports in 3-1 reporting mode and
on TM9 ACKs/NACKs are transmitted simultaneously in a
LAOFD cell. If this option is selected, the eNodeB performs
-001001 DL 4- preallocation for aperiodic CQI reports. If this option
/ Layer is deselected, the eNodeB performs CQI_ONLY
TDLAO MIMO scheduling on aperiodic CQI reports. This option
FD-001 Based applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
001 on TM9
TDLAO LTE-A UeSRSAntSelectCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to
FD-110 Introduc disable antenna selection for SRS transmission. If this
401 tion option is selected, antenna selection is disabled. This
option applies only to LTE TDD.
TDLAO Inter-
FD-081 eNodeB CaCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to
402 CA enable a workaround of problems that may occur
LBFD-0 based on when periodic CQI reports and ACKs/NACKs are
60101 Coordin transmitted simultaneously in a cell in CA scenarios.
ated If this option is selected, the eNodeB sets the
MRFD- eNodeB SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch parameter to OFF(Off)
101222 for CA UEs. If this option is deselected, the eNodeB
Inter-
MRFD- sets the SimulAckNackAndCqiSwitch parameter
eNodeB
111222 based on the original algorithm for CA UEs.
CA
Based HoRlcSnSizeSwitch: Controls the configuration of
on RLC sn-FieldLength during handovers. If this option
Relaxed is selected, the configuration of RLC sn-FieldLength
Backhau for the target cell is the same as that for the source
l cell. If this option is deselected, RLC sn-FieldLength
for the target cell is set to the value configured at the
Optimiz target side.
ation of
CQI FddTddCaPcellDuplexFdd: Indicates whether the
Reportin eNodeB regards that a UE supports FDD+TDD CA
g with an LTE FDD cell serving as its PCell when the
FDD UE reports the FDD+TDD CA band combination but
+TDD does not report IE tdd-FDD-CA-PCellDuplex-r12. If
Downlin this option is selected, the eNodeB regards that the UE
k supports this type of CA. If this option is deselected,
Carrier the eNodeB regards that the UE does not support this
Aggrega type of CA. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
tion LTE TDD.

eRAN

nd
(LTE FddTddCaPcellDuplexTdd: Indicates whether the

FDD) eNodeB regards that a UE supports FDD+TDD CA
FDD with an LTE TDD cell serving as its PCell when the
+TDD UE reports the FDD+TDD CA band combination but
Uplink does not report IE tdd-FDD-CA-PCellDuplex-r12. If
Carrier this option is selected, the eNodeB regards that the UE
Aggrega supports this type of CA. If this option is deselected,
tion(LT the eNodeB regards that the UE does not support this
E FDD) type of CA. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether
UEs of category 6 and above (excluding category 5)
support four-layer MIMO based on TM3/TM4. If this
option is selected, UEs of category 6 or above
(excluding category 5) support MIMO at a maximum
of four layers based on TM3/TM4. If this option is
deselected, UEs of category 6 or above (excluding
category 5) support MIMO at a maximum of two
layers based on TM3/TM4. This option applies only to
UeCsiRsCfigCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to
configure CSI-RSs for TM9-incapable UEs complying
with 3GPP Release 10 or later after the cell sends
CSI-RSs. If this option is selected, CSI-RSs are
configured for such UEs. If this option is deselected,
CSI-RSs are not configured for such UEs. This option
GUI Value Range: UECapRprtAbnormalCtrlS-
witch(UECapRprtAbnormalCtrlSwitch),
ApCqiRptAbnormalCtrlS-
witch(ApCqiRptAbnormalCtrlSwitch),
UeInterRatMeasCtrlSwitch(UeInterRatMeasCtrlS-
witch), VoipExProtSwitch(VoipExProtSwitch),
UeSRSAntSelectCtrlSwitch(UeSRSAntSelectCtrlS-
witch), ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlS-
witch(ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch),
CaCqiAndAckAbnCtrlS-
witch(CaCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch),
HoRlcSnSizeSwitch(HoRlcSnSizeSwitch),
FddTddCaPcellDuplexFdd(FddTddCaPcellDu-
plexFdd), FddTddCaPcellDu-
plexTdd(FddTddCaPcellDuplexTdd),
Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch(Tm3Tm4Max4Layer
CtrlSwitch), UeCsiRsCfigCtrlS-
witch(UeCsiRsCfigCtrlSwitch)
Unit: None

eRAN

nd
Actual Value Range: UECapRprtAbnormalCtrlSwitch,

ApCqiRptAbnormalCtrlSwitch,
UeInterRatMeasCtrlSwitch, VoipExProtSwitch,
UeSRSAntSelectCtrlSwitch,
ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch,
CaCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch, HoRlcSnSizeSwitch,
FddTddCaPcellDuplexFdd, FddTddCaPcellDu-
plexTdd, Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch,
UeCsiRsCfigCtrlSwitch
Default Value: UECapRprtAbnormalCtrlSwitch:Off,
ApCqiRptAbnormalCtrlSwitch:On,
UeInterRatMeasCtrlSwitch:Off,
VoipExProtSwitch:Off, UeSRSAntSelectCtrlS-
witch:Off, ApCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch:Off,
CaCqiAndAckAbnCtrlSwitch:On,
HoRlcSnSizeSwitch:On, FddTddCaPcellDu-
plexFdd:On, FddTddCaPcellDuplexTdd:Off,
Tm3Tm4Max4LayerCtrlSwitch:Off,
UeCsiRsCfigCtrlSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg DMIMO MOD TDLEO DL D- Meaning:

oSwitch AlgoSwi CELLA FD-1115 MIMO Indicates whether to enable D-MIMO algorithms. This
tch LGOSW 05 Inter- parameter applies only to LTE TDD.
ITCH TDLEO Cell DL
LST FD-130 D- DmimoJTSwitch: Indicates whether to enable D-
CELLA 501 MIMO MIMO joint transmission. If this option is selected, D-
LGOSW MIMO joint transmission is enabled. If this option is
TDLEO Inter- deselected, D-MIMO joint transmission is disabled.
ITCH FD-121 eNodeB This option applies only to LTE TDD.
501 DL D-
MIMO DmimoSchAttriOptSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable scheduling attribute optimization for D-MIMO
UEs. If this option is selected, scheduling attribute
optimization is enabled for D-MIMO UEs. If this
option is deselected, scheduling attribute optimization
is disabled for D-MIMO UEs. This option applies
only to LTE TDD.
InterCellDmimoJTSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
inter-cell D-MIMO. If this option is selected, inter-cell
D-MIMO is enabled. If this option is deselected, inter-
cell D-MIMO is disabled. This option applies only to
LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range:
DmimoJTSwitch(DmimoJTSwitch),
DmimoSchAttriOptSwitch(DmimoSchAttriOptS-
witch), InterCellDmimoJTS-
witch(InterCellDmimoJTSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: DmimoJTSwitch,
DmimoSchAttriOptSwitch, InterCellDmimoJTSwitch
Default Value: DmimoJTSwitch:Off,
DmimoSchAttriOptSwitch:Off, InterCellDmimoJTS-
witch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg Dl256Q MOD LBFD-0 Basic Meaning:

oSwitch amAlgo CELLA 02025/ Scheduli Indicates whether to enable the algorithms related to
Switch LGOSW TDLBF ng downlink (DL) 256 quadrature amplitude modulation
ITCH D-00202 Dynami (256QAM).
LST 5 c
CELLA LBFD-0 Scheduli Dl256QamSwitch: Indicates whether to enable DL
LGOSW 0101502 ng 256QAM. If this option is selected, DL 256QAM is
ITCH / enabled, and the highest-order DL modulation scheme
DL is 256QAM for UEs that support DL 256QAM. If this
TDLBF 256QA
D-00101 option is deselected, DL 256QAM is disabled and the
M highest-order DL modulation scheme is 64QAM. This
502
feature takes effect only when a UBBP or LBBPd
LEOFD- board is configured. This parameter applies only to
110301/ LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
TDLEO
FD-110 Dl256QamAccessorySwitch: Indicates whether to
515 enable DL 256QAM accessory. DL 256QAM
accessory is enabled only if this option is selected.
When this option is selected, error vector magnitude
(EVM) is optimized for 256QAM in the TTIs in
which DL 256QAM takes effect. The function takes
effect only when a UBBP board is configured. This
option applies only to LTE FDD.
Dl256QamTbsIndexExtSwitch: Indicates whether to
support TBS index 33B for DL 256QAM UEs. TBS
index 33B is supported only if this option is selected.
GUI Value Range:
Dl256QamSwitch(Dl256QamSwitch),
Dl256QamAccessorySwitch(Dl256QamAccessorySwi
tch), Dl256QamTbsIndexExtS-
witch(Dl256QamTbsIndexExtSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Dl256QamSwitch,
Dl256QamAccessorySwitch,
Dl256QamTbsIndexExtSwitch
Default Value: Dl256QamSwitch:Off,
Dl256QamAccessorySwitch:Off,
Dl256QamTbsIndexExtSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg UlSchS MOD LOFD-0 VoIP Meaning:

oSwitch witch CELLA 01016/ Semi- Indicates whether to enable uplink scheduling
LGOSW TDLOF persisten functions for the cell.
ITCH D-00101 t
LST 6 Scheduli SpsSchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable semi-
CELLA LOFD-0 ng persistent scheduling during talk spurts of VoLTE
LGOSW 01048/ TTI services. If this option is selected, semi-persistent
ITCH TDLOF Bundlin scheduling is applied during talk spurts of VoLTE
D-00104 g services. If this option is deselected, dynamic
8 scheduling is applied during talk spurts of VoLTE
Dynami services. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LBFD-0 c LTE TDD.
0101502 Scheduli
/ ng SinrAdjustSwitch: Indicates whether to adjust the
TDLBF Basic measured SINR based on ACK/NACK messages in
D-00101 Scheduli the UL hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ)
502 ng processes. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LBFD-0 LTE TDD.
MBR>G
02025/ BR PreAllocationSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
TDLBF Configu preallocation in the uplink. If this option is selected:
D-00202 ration (1) If the SmartPreAllocationSwitch option is
5
UL 2x2 deselected and a UE is in the discontinuous reception
LBFD-0 MU- (DRX) state, preallocation is disabled for the UE in
70102/ MIMO the uplink; (2) If the SmartPreAllocationSwitch option
TDLBF is deselected and the UE is not in the DRX state,
D-07010 UL 2x4 preallocation is enabled for the UE in the uplink; (3) If
2 MU- the SmartPreAllocationSwitch option is selected and
MIMO the SmartPreAllocationDuration parameter value is
LOFD-0
01002 AMC greater than 0, smart preallocation is enabled for the
Uplink UE in the uplink; (4) If the SmartPreAllocationSwitch
LOFD-0 option is selected and the SmartPreAllocationDuration
01058/ Coverag
e parameter value is 0, preallocation is disabled for the
TDLOF UE in the uplink. If this option is deselected,
D-00105 Improve
ment for preallocation is disabled for the UE in the uplink. If
8 bearer-level preallocation or bearer-level smart
Video
LBFD-0 preallocation is enabled for a QCI, cell-level
01006/ Enhance preallocation and cell-level smart preallocation do not
TDLBF d UL apply to UEs with the QCI. This option applies only to
D-00100 Frequen LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
6 cy
Selectiv UlVmimoSwitch: Indicates whether to enable multi-
LOFD-1 e user MIMO (MU-MIMO) in the uplink. If this option
20205 Scheduli is selected, the eNodeB performs MU-MIMO pairing
LBFD-0 ng among UEs based on related principles. UEs forming
60102 UL a pair transmit data using the same time-frequency
TDLEO 2x64 resources, which improves the system throughput and
FD-121 MU- spectral efficiency. This option applies only to LTE
60302 MIMO FDD and LTE TDD.

eRAN

nd
TDLEO UL 4- TtiBundlingSwitch: Indicates whether to enable

FD-121 Layer transmission time interval (TTI) bundling. If TTI
609 MU- bundling is enabled, more transmission opportunities
TDLEO MIMO are available to UEs within the delay budget for
FD-121 UL 8- VoLTE services on the Uu interface, thereby
610 Layer improving uplink coverage. This option applies only
MU- to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
TDLOF
D-07022 MIMO SmartPreAllocationSwitch: Indicates whether to
2/ Scheduli enable uplink smart preallocation when the
LOFD-1 ng PreAllocationSwitch option is selected. If both the
31213 Based PreAllocationSwitch option and this option are
on Max selected and the SmartPreAllocationDuration
Bit Rate parameter in the CellPreallocGroup MO is set to a
value greater than 0, uplink smart preallocation is
enabled. Otherwise, uplink smart preallocation is
LTE TDD.
PuschDtxSwitch: Indicates whether the eNodeB uses
the PUSCH discontinuous transmission (DTX)
detection result during uplink scheduling. If this
option is selected for an LTE FDD cell, the eNodeB
determines whether to perform adaptive
retransmission, and also adjusts the CCE aggregation
level of the PDCCH carrying downlink control
information (DCI) format 0 based on the PUSCH
DTX detection result during uplink scheduling. If an
LTE FDD cell is established on an LBBPc, this option
takes effect only if the cell uses less than four RX
antennas and normal cyclic prefix (CP) in the uplink
and the SrsCfgInd parameter in the SRSCfg MO is set
to BOOLEAN_TRUE(True). Note that the LBBPc
does not support PUSCH DTX detection for VMIMO
UEs. For an LTE TDD cell, this option takes effect
only when the uplink-downlink subframe
configuration is set to SA2 or SA5. If this option takes
effect, the eNodeB adjusts the CCE aggregation level
based on the PUSCH DTX detection results. Note that
LTE TDD cells established on LBBPc boards do not
support PUSCH DTX detection. This option applies
UlIblerAdjustSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
uplink IBLER adjustment algorithm. If this option is
selected, the target IBLER is adjusted for UEs based
on the channel quality and fluctuation to increase the
cell throughput. This option applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD. If this option is selected independently

eRAN

nd
for FDD cells with the UlTargetIBlerAdaptType

option deselected, the algorithm does not take effect.
UlEnhancedFssSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
uplink load-based enhanced frequency selective
scheduling. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
UlIicsAlgoSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
uplink interference-intensity-based coordinated
scheduling (UL IICS) algorithm. If this option is
selected, interference can be reduced based on
accurate detection of user attributes and scheduling
resource coordination, increasing the cell edge
throughput. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
UlEnhancedSrSchSwitch: Indicates whether uplink re-
scheduling is performed only when the On Duration
timer for the DRX long cycle starts. Uplink re-
scheduling is required if the number of HARQ
retransmissions for a scheduling request (SR) reaches
the maximum value but the scheduling still fails. If
this option is selected, uplink re-scheduling is
performed only when the On Duration timer for the
DRX long cycle starts. If this option is deselected,
uplink re-scheduling is performed immediately when
the number of HARQ retransmissions for SR reaches
the maximum value but the scheduling still fails. It is
recommended that this option be selected for live
networks. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch: Indicates whether the
uplink scheduler performs scheduling without
considering power control restrictions. If this option is
selected, the uplink scheduler performs scheduling
without considering power control restrictions,
ensuring full utilization of the transmit power for all
UEs. If this option is deselected, the uplink scheduler
considers power control restrictions while performing
scheduling. In this case, the transmit power cannot be
fully used for UEs at the cell edge or between the cell
edge and cell center. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
UlMinGbrSwitch: Indicates whether to ensure uplink
minimum guaranteed bit rate (GBR). If this option is
selected, the minimum GBR of non-GBR services is
ensured by increasing the scheduling priority of UEs
whose non-GBR service rates are lower than the
minimum GBR of GBR services. This option applies

eRAN

nd
UlMbrCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to enable uplink

scheduling based on the maximum bit rate (MBR) and
guaranteed bit rate (GBR) on the GBR bearer. If this
option is selected, the eNodeB performs uplink
scheduling on GBR bearers based on the MBR and
GBR. If this option is deselected, the eNodeB
performs uplink scheduling on GBR bearers based
only on the GBR. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
MbrUlSchSwitch: Indicates whether the eNodeB
performs uplink scheduling based on the MBR. If this
option is selected, the eNodeB prioritizes UEs based
on the MBRs during uplink scheduling. This option
UeAmbrUlSchSwitch: Indicates whether the eNodeB
performs uplink scheduling based on the aggregate
maximum bit rate (AMBR) of UEs. If this option is
selected, the eNodeB prioritizes UEs based on the
AMBRs of UEs during uplink scheduling. This option
UlEnhancedDopplerSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable enhanced uplink scheduling based on mobility
speed estimation. If this option is selected, enhanced
uplink scheduling based on mobility speed estimation
is enabled. In enhanced uplink scheduling based on
mobility speed estimation, the eNodeB uses Doppler
measurement results to identify low-speed UEs to
further improve uplink performance of low-speed
UEs. If this option is deselected, enhanced uplink
scheduling based on mobility speed is disabled.
Enhanced uplink scheduling based on mobility speed
takes effect only when the DopMeasLevel parameter
is set to CLASS_1(CLASS_1) and the
UlEnhancedDopplerSwitch option is selected. This
option does not apply to cells established on LBBPc
boards. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
UlRaUserSchOptSw: Indicates whether the eNodeB
raises the scheduling priority of UEs sending uplink
access signaling, including MSG5 and the RRC
Connection Reconfiguration Complete message. If
this option is selected, the eNodeB raises the
scheduling priority of UEs sending uplink access
signaling. If this option is deselected, the eNodeB
does not raise the scheduling priority of UEs sending
uplink access signaling. In NB-IoT scenarios with air
interface resource congestion, this option restricts the

eRAN

nd
number of preambles to perform flow control on UEs

accessing the cell.
UlLast2RetransSchOptSwitch: Indicates whether to

optimize the scheduling policy for the last two
retransmissions. If this option is selected, the
scheduling policy is optimized for the last two
retransmissions. If the UE transmit power is not
limited, adaptive retransmission is used, and the
number of RBs increases in the last two
retransmissions to increase the receive success rate of
the last two retransmissions and decrease uplink
RBLER. If this option is deselected, the scheduling
policy is not optimized for the last two
retransmissions. This option applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
UlInterfFssSwitch: Indicates whether to enable

interference-based uplink frequency-selective
scheduling. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
UlSmallRBSpectralEffOptSw: Indicates whether to

improve the spectral efficiency of small RBs in the
uplink. If this option is selected, the spectral efficiency
of small RBs in the uplink is optimized, ensuring that
the transmission block size calculated based on
optimized spectral efficiency is not less than the traffic
volume to be scheduled. If this option is deselected,
the spectral efficiency of small RBs in the uplink is
not optimized. This option applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
PuschUsePucchRbSwitch: Indicates whether PUCCH

RBs can be occupied by the PUSCH. In scenarios
with a single user: If this option is selected, PUCCH
RBs can be occupied by the PUSCH; if this option is
deselected, PUCCH RBs cannot be occupied by the
PUSCH. In scenarios with multiple users, PUCCH
RBs cannot be occupied by the PUSCH regardless of
the setting of this option. This option applies only to
PuschDtxSchOptSwitch: If this option is selected, the

eNodeB determines whether to perform adaptive
retransmission based on the PUSCH DTX detection
result during uplink scheduling. This option takes
effect only when the uplink-downlink subframe
configuration SA2 or SA5 is used. If an LTE TDD cell
is established on an LBBPc, PUSCH DTX detection is
not supported. This option applies only to LTE TDD.

eRAN

nd
PrachRbReuseSwitch: If this option is selected, the

PUSCH and PRACH transmissions can use the same
resource. If this option is deselected, the PUSCH and
PRACH transmissions cannot use the same resource.
ULFSSAlgoswitch: If this option is deselected, uplink
frequency-selective scheduling is disabled. If this
option is selected, uplink frequency-selective
scheduling is enabled. This option applies only to LTE
TDD.
SrSchDataAdptSw: Indicates whether to enable data
amount adaptation in SR-based scheduling. Data
amount adaptation in SR-based scheduling is enabled
only when this option is selected. This option applies
only to LTE FDD.
UlFssUserThdStSwitch: If this option is selected, the
UE number threshold is optimized for uplink
frequency selective scheduling. If this option is
deselected, the UE number threshold is not optimized
for uplink frequency selective scheduling. This option
HighOrderVMIMOSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable high order VMIMO. If this option is selected,
high order VMIMO is enabled. If this option is
deselected, high order VMIMO is disabled. This
VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBSwitch: Indicates
whether to perform uplink MU MIMO for UEs whose
MCS index is reduced in the downlink to increase the
number of available RBs in non-massive MIMO
scenarios, or whether the beam determination criteria
are loosened up for uplink MU MIMO pairing in
massive MIMO scenarios. In non-massive MIMO
scenarios: (1) If this option is selected, uplink MU
MIMO can be performed for UEs whose MCS index
is reduced to increase the number of available RBs.
(2) If this option is deselected, uplink MU MIMO
cannot be performed for UEs whose MCS index is
reduced to increase the number of available RBs. In
massive MIMO scenarios: (1) If the option is selected,
the eNodeB loosens up the beam determination
criteria for uplink MU MIMO pairing. (2) If this
option is deselected, the eNodeB does not loosen up
such criteria. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch: Indicates whether VMIMO
pairing is performed for VoLTE UEs. If this option is

eRAN

nd
selected, VMIMO pairing is performed for VoLTE

UEs. If this option is deselected, VMIMO pairing is
not performed for VoLTE UEs. This option applies
only to LTE TDD.
TtiBundlingForVideoSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable TTI bundling for UEs running video services
in weak coverage areas. If this option is selected, TTI
bundling is enabled for UEs running video services in
weak coverage areas, improving video service
coverage at the cell edge. If this option is deselected,
TTI bundling is disabled for UEs running video
services in weak coverage areas. This option applies
only to LTE FDD.
GUI Value Range: SpsSchSwitch(SpsSchSwitch),
SinrAdjustSwitch(SinrAdjustSwitch),
PreAllocationSwitch(PreAllocationSwitch),
UlVmimoSwitch(UlVmimoSwitch),
TtiBundlingSwitch(TtiBundlingSwitch),
SmartPreAllocationSwitch(SmartPreAllocationS-
witch), PuschDtxSwitch(PuschDtxSwitch),
UlIblerAdjustSwitch(UlIblerAdjustSwitch),
UlEnhancedFssSwitch(UlEnhancedFssSwitch),
UlEnhancedSrSchSwitch(UlEnhancedSrSchSwitch),
SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch(SchedulerCtrlPowerS-
witch), UlIicsAlgoSwitch(UlIicsAlgoSwitch),
UlMinGbrSwitch(UlMinGbrSwitch),
UlMbrCtrlSwitch(UlMbrCtrlSwitch),
MbrUlSchSwitch(MbrUlSchSwitch),
UeAmbrUlSchSwitch(UeAmbrUlSchSwitch),
UlEnhancedDopplerSwitch(UlEnhancedDopplerS-
witch), UlRaUserSchOptSw(UlRaUserSchOptSw),
UlLast2RetransSchOptSwitch(UlLast2RetransSchOpt
Switch), UlInterfFssSwitch(UlInterfFssSwitch),
UlSmallRBSpectralEffOptSw(UlSmallRBSpectralEf-
ficiencyOptSw), PuschUsePucchRbS-
witch(PuschUsePucchRbSwitch), PuschDtxSchOptS-
witch(PuschDtxSchOptSwitch),
ULFSSAlgoSwitch(ULFSSAlgoSwitch),
PrachRbReuseSwitch(PrachRbReuseSwitch),
SrSchDataAdptSw(SrSchDataAdptSw),
UlFssUserThdStSwitch(UlFssUserThdStSwitch),
HighOrderVMIMOSwitch(HighOrderVMIMOS-
witch), VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBS-
witch(VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBSwitch),
VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch(VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch),
TtiBundlingForVideoSwitch(TtiBundlingForVideoS-
witch)

eRAN

nd
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: SpsSchSwitch,
SinrAdjustSwitch, PreAllocationSwitch,
UlVmimoSwitch, TtiBundlingSwitch,
SmartPreAllocationSwitch, PuschDtxSwitch,
UlIblerAdjustSwitch, UlEnhancedFssSwitch,
UlEnhancedSrSchSwitch, SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch,
UlIicsAlgoSwitch, UlMinGbrSwitch,
UlMbrCtrlSwitch, MbrUlSchSwitch,
UeAmbrUlSchSwitch, UlEnhancedDopplerSwitch,
UlRaUserSchOptSw, UlLast2RetransSchOptSwitch,
UlInterfFssSwitch, UlSmallRBSpectralEffOptSw,
PuschUsePucchRbSwitch, PuschDtxSchOptSwitch,
ULFSSAlgoSwitch, PrachRbReuseSwitch,
SrSchDataAdptSw, UlFssUserThdStSwitch,
HighOrderVMIMOSwitch, VMIMOReduceMCSRi-
seRBSwitch, VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch,
TtiBundlingForVideoSwitch
Default Value: SpsSchSwitch:Off,
SinrAdjustSwitch:On, PreAllocationSwitch:On,
UlVmimoSwitch:Off, TtiBundlingSwitch:Off,
SmartPreAllocationSwitch:On, PuschDtxSwitch:On,
UlIblerAdjustSwitch:Off, UlEnhancedFssSwitch:On,
UlEnhancedSrSchSwitch:On, SchedulerCtrlPowerS-
witch:Off, UlIicsAlgoSwitch:Off,
UlMinGbrSwitch:Off, UlMbrCtrlSwitch:Off,
MbrUlSchSwitch:Off, UeAmbrUlSchSwitch:Off,
UlEnhancedDopplerSwitch:On,
UlRaUserSchOptSw:Off,
UlLast2RetransSchOptSwitch:On,
UlInterfFssSwitch:Off, UlSmallRBSpectralEf-
fOptSw:Off, PuschUsePucchRbSwitch:Off,
PuschDtxSchOptSwitch:Off, ULFSSAlgoSwitch:On,
PrachRbReuseSwitch:Off, SrSchDataAdptSw:On,
UlFssUserThdStSwitch:Off, HighOrderVMIMOS-
witch:Off, VMIMOReduceMCSRiseRBSwitch:Off,
VoLTEUeVmimoSwitch:Off, TtiBundlingForVideoS-
witch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg UplinkC MOD LOFD-0 Intra- Meaning:

oSwitch ompSwi CELLA 01066/ eNodeB Indicates whether to enable uplink coordinated
tch LGOSW TDLOF UL multipoint reception (UL CoMP) for a cell.
ITCH D-00106 CoMP
LST 6 Intra- UlJointReceptionSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
CELLA LOFD-0 eNodeB intra-eNodeB intra-BBP UL CoMP. Intra-eNodeB
LGOSW 70222 UL intra-BBP UL CoMP is enabled only if this option is
ITCH CoMP selected.
LOFD-0
70223 Phase II UlJointReceptionPhaseIISwitch: Indicates whether to
TDLOF UL enable intra-eNodeB inter-BBP UL CoMP. Intra-
D-08120 CoMP eNodeB inter-BBP UL CoMP is enabled only if this
7 Based option is selected. This option can be selected only
on when the UlJointReceptionSwitch option is selected.
LOFD-1 Coordin This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
20205 ated
MLOFD eNodeB UlJointReception3CellSwitch: Indicates whether to
-131205 enable 3-cell UL CoMP in the serving cell. The
UL coordinating cell cannot determine whether it is
CoMP involved in three-cell UL CoMP. Assume that the
Based UlJointReception3CellSwitch option is selected for
on cell A and the UlJointReceptionSwitch option is
Coordin selected for cell B. Then, three-cell UL CoMP is
ated enabled in cell A that acts as the serving cell, while
eNodeB three-cell UL CoMP does not need to be enabled for
Uplink cell B that acts as a coordinating cell. Three-cell UL
Coverag CoMP is enabled in the serving cell only if this option
e is selected. This option can be selected only when the
Improve UlJointReceptionSwitch option is selected. This
ment for option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
Video
UlHetnetJointReceptionSwitch: Indicates whether to
Intra- enable UL CoMP in HetNet. UL CoMP is enabled in
eNodeB HetNet only if this option is selected. This option can
UL be selected only when the UlJointReceptionSwitch
CoMP option is selected. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
UlCompRollbackSwitch: Indicates whether a CoMP
UE is not selected any more for UL CoMP and
becomes a non-CoMP UE. If this option is selected,
the eNodeB detects signal qualities and interference
changes of the serving and coordinating cells of a
CoMP UE in real time. If the eNodeB detects that the
interference from signals of UEs in the coordinating
cell cannot be mitigated using UL CoMP, the eNodeB
no longer selects the CoMP UE in UL CoMP, and the
UE becomes a non-CoMP UE. If this option is
deselected, the eNodeB always selects the CoMP UE
in UL CoMP, and the UE will never become a non-

eRAN

nd
CoMP UE. This option applies only to cells

established on LBBPc boards. This option applies
only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD. The setting of the
UlCompRollbackSwitch option is still synchronized
between the U2000 and the eNodeB, but it is no
longer used internally. The UlCompRollbackSwitch
option will be removed in later versions. Therefore,
you are advised not to use this option.
UlHetnetCompManualNcellCfgSw: Indicates whether
to enable automatic or manual configuration of a
macro cell's neighboring cell list for measurement and
a micro cell's homing macro cell. If this option is
deselected, automatic configuration is enabled. If this
option is selected, manual configuration is enabled.
One micro cell can belong to only one macro cell.
UlHetnetCompOnUlRsrpSw: Indicates whether to use
UL RSRP measurement for selecting coordinating
cells. If this option is deselected, A3-based
measurement is used for selecting coordinating cells
in macro-micro scenarios. If this option is selected,
A3-based measurement is used in macro-macro
scenarios, and UL-RSRP- or A3-baesd measurement
is used in macro-micro scenarios. This option takes
effect only when the UlHetnetJointReceptionSwitch
FDD and LTE TDD.
SimplePairedCompSw: Indicates whether to select UL
CoMP UEs for VMIMIO pairing. If this option and
the UlJointReceptionSwitch option of this parameter
and the UlVmimoSwitch option of the UlSchSwitch
parameter are selected, UL CoMP UEs in cells
working in 8R mode can be selected for VMIMO
pairing. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
VoipPrioSw: Indicates whether to prioritize VoIP UEs.
If this option is selected, VoIP UEs have a higher
priority than other UEs. If this option is deselected,
VoIP UEs have a lower priority than other UEs. This
UlCompInterBoardType2Sw: Indicates whether to
enable inter-BBP UL CoMP for type-2 UEs. If this
option and the UlJointReceptionSwitch and
UlJointReceptionPhaseIISwitch options are selected,
inter-BBP UL CoMP for type-2 UEs is enabled. This

eRAN

nd
UlCompForVideoSwitch: Indicates whether to enable

UL CoMP for uplink video services. If this option is
selected, UL CoMP can be enabled exclusively for
UEs running video services. If this option is
deselected, UL CoMP cannot be enabled exclusively
for UEs running video services. This option applies
only to LTE FDD.
UlJointIRCEnhancedFor2R: Indicates whether to
enable uplink joint IRC enhancement. If this option is
selected, the eNodeB enables uplink joint IRC
enhancement in 2R scenarios and three-cell and inter-
BBP joint IRC. If this option is deselected, the
eNodeB disables uplink joint IRC enhancement in 2R
scenarios and three-cell and inter-BBP joint IRC. This
option applies only to 2T2R LTE TDD eNodeBs.
WideRangeCompSwitch: Indicates whether to
perform UL CoMP in a wider scope. If this option is
selected, the eNodeB performs UL CoMP in a wider
scope. If this option is deselected, the eNodeB cannot
perform UL CoMP in a wider scope. This option
EnhancedUlCompSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
the enhanced UL CoMP algorithm, which allows UL
CoMP to take effect in a wider range. The enhanced
UL CoMP algorithm takes effect only after this option
is selected. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
GUI Value Range: UlJointReceptionS-
witch(UlJointReceptionSwitch), UlJointReception-
PhaseIISwitch(UlJointReceptionPhaseIISwitch),
UlCompRollbackSwitch(UlCompRollbackSwitch),
UlJointReception3CellSwitch(UlJointReception3Cell
Switch), UlHetnetJointReceptionS-
witch(UlHetnetJointReceptionSwitch),
UlHetnetCompManualN-
cellCfgSw(UlHetnetCompManualNcellCfgSw),
UlHetnetCompOnUlRsrpSw(UlHetnetCompOnUlRsr
pSw), SimplePairedCompSw(SimplePairedCompSw),
VoipPrioSw(VoipPrioSw), UlCompInterBoard-
Type2Sw(UlCompInterBoardType2Sw),
UlCompForVideoSwitch(UlCompForVideoSwitch),
WideRangeCompSwitch(WideRangeCompSwitch),
EnhancedUlCompSwitch(EnhancedUlCompSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: UlJointReceptionSwitch,
UlJointReceptionPhaseIISwitch, UlCompRollbackS-
witch, UlJointReception3CellSwitch,

eRAN

nd
UlHetnetJointReceptionSwitch,
UlHetnetCompManualNcellCfgSw,
UlHetnetCompOnUlRsrpSw, SimplePairedCompSw,
VoipPrioSw, UlCompInterBoardType2Sw,
UlCompForVideoSwitch, WideRangeCompSwitch,
EnhancedUlCompSwitch
Default Value: UlJointReceptionSwitch:Off,
UlJointReceptionPhaseIISwitch:Off,
UlCompRollbackSwitch:On,
UlJointReception3CellSwitch:Off, UlHetnetJointRe-
ceptionSwitch:Off, UlHetnetCompManualN-
cellCfgSw:Off, UlHetnetCompOnUlRsrpSw:Off,
SimplePairedCompSw:Off, VoipPrioSw:Off,
UlCompInterBoardType2Sw:Off, UlCompForVideoS-
witch:Off, WideRangeCompSwitch:Off,
EnhancedUlCompSwitch:Off
CellAlg PsicSwit MOD LOFD-0 Advance Meaning: Indicates whether to enable parallel soft
oSwitch ch CELLA 01096 d interference cancellation (PSIC). In the case of LTE
LGOSW Receiver FDD, PSIC can be used in cells established on UBBP
ITCH (PSIC) or LBBPd boards in uplink 2x2 MU-MIMO scenarios.
LST In the case of LTE TDD, PSIC can be used in cells
CELLA established on UBBP boards in uplink 2x4 MU-
LGOSW MIMO scenarios. This parameter applies only to LTE
ITCH FDD and LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: MumimoPuschPsicS-
witch(MumimoPuschPsicSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: MumimoPuschPsicSwitch
Default Value: MumimoPuschPsicSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
Cell HighSpe ADD LOFD-0 High Meaning: Indicates the speed flag of the cell. Set this
edFlag CELL 01007/ Speed parameter to HIGH_SPEED if the cell is used to
MOD TDLOF Mobility provide coverage for a high-speed railway. Set this
CELL D-00100 Ultra parameter to LOW_SPEED in other scenarios. TDD
7 High cells with a bandwidth of 5 MHz or in 8T8R mode can
LST only be configured as low-speed cells. TDD cells
CELL LOFD-0 Speed
01008 Mobility cannot be configured as ultra-high-speed cells. This
parameter applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: LOW_SPEED(Low speed cell
flag), HIGH_SPEED(High speed cell flag),
ULTRA_HIGH_SPEED(Ultra high speed cell flag),
EXTRA_HIGH_SPEED(Extra high speed cell flag)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: LOW_SPEED, HIGH_SPEED,
ULTRA_HIGH_SPEED, EXTRA_HIGH_SPEED
Default Value: LOW_SPEED(Low speed cell flag)

eRAN

nd
CellAlg SfnUpli MOD LOFD-0 SFN Meaning:

oSwitch nkComp CELLA 03029/ Adaptiv Indicates whether to enable UL CoMP for an SFN
Switch LGOSW TDLOF e SFN/ cell.
ITCH D-00107 SDMA
LST 5 IntraBaseBandSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
Intra- intra-BBP UL CoMP for an SFN cell. If this option is
CELLA LOFD-0 eNodeB
LGOSW 70205/ selected, intra-BBP UL CoMP takes effect in an SFN
UL cell. If this option is deselected, intra-BBP UL CoMP
ITCH TDLOF CoMP
D-00200 is disabled for an SFN cell.
8 InterBaseBandSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
MLOFD inter-BBP UL CoMP for an SFN cell. If this option is
-131205 selected, inter-BBP UL CoMP takes effect in an SFN
cell. If this option is deselected, inter-BBP UL CoMP
is disabled for an SFN cell. The setting of this option
is valid only if the IntraBaseBandSwitch option is
selected.
ComCoverUlCompSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable UL CoMP when multiple RRUs provide the
same coverage in an SFN cell. If this option is
selected, UL CoMP is supported when multiple RRUs
provide the same coverage in an SFN cell. If this
option is deselected, UL CoMP is not supported when
multiple RRUs provide the same coverage in an SFN
cell. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
SfnUplinkComp3CellSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable 3-cell UL CoMP for an SFN cell. If this option
is selected, 3-cell UL CoMP is enabled for an SFN
cell. If this option is deselected, 3-cell UL CoMP is
disabled for an SFN cell. The setting of this option is
valid only if the IntraBaseBandSwitch or
InterBaseBandSwitch option is selected. This option
GUI Value Range:
IntraBaseBandSwitch(IntraBaseBandSwitch),
InterBaseBandSwitch(InterBaseBandSwitch),
ComCoverUlCompSwitch(ComCoverUlCompS-
witch),
SfnUplinkComp3CellSwitch(SfnUplinkComp3CellS
witch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: IntraBaseBandSwitch,
InterBaseBandSwitch, ComCoverUlCompSwitch,
SfnUplinkComp3CellSwitch

eRAN

nd
Default Value: IntraBaseBandSwitch:Off,

InterBaseBandSwitch:Off, ComCoverUlCompS-
witch:Off, SfnUplinkComp3CellSwitch:Off
UlInterf RemoteI MOD TDLOF Interfere Meaning:

Suppres nfULEn ULINT D-08121 nce Indicates whether to enhance uplink channels in the
sCfg hanceS ERFSU 7 Detectio case of remote interference (atmospheric duct
w PPRESS n and interference) occurs.
CFG Suppres
LST sion RMT_INF_PUSCH_ENH_SW: Indicates whether to
ULINT enhance the PUSCH when remote interference occurs.
ERFSU If this option is selected, the PUSCH is enhanced
PPRESS when remote interference occurs. If this option is
CFG deselected, the PUSCH is not enhanced when remote
interference occurs. This parameter applies only to
LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range:
RMT_INF_PUSCH_ENH_SW(RMT_INF_PUSCH_
ENH_SW)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: RMT_INF_PUSCH_ENH_SW
Default Value: RMT_INF_PUSCH_ENH_SW:Off
CellAlg UlIcSwi MOD TDLOF Uplink Meaning: Indicates whether to enable the uplink
oSwitch tch CELLA D-11120 Interfere interference coordination algorithm. If the
LGOSW 8 nce UL_ICS_SWITCH(UlIcSwitch) option is deselected,
ITCH Coordin the uplink interference coordination algorithm does
LST ation not take effect. If the UL_ICS_SWITCH(UlIcSwitch)
CELLA option is selected, the uplink interference coordination
LGOSW algorithm is enabled. This parameter applies only to
ITCH LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: UL_ICS_SWITCH(UlIcSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: UL_ICS_SWITCH
Default Value: UL_ICS_SWITCH:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg CellDlC MOD LBFD-0 PDSCH Meaning:

oSwitch overEnh CELLA 70106 Efficien Indicates whether to enable the two functions related
anceSwi LGOSW LEOFD- cy to downlink coverage enhancement in the cell.
tch ITCH 121204 Improve
LST ment DlCellCoverEnhanceAlgoSw: Indicates whether to
CELLA 3D enable cell coverage enhancement. After this function
LGOSW Beamfor is enabled, the throughput of cell-edge UEs with
ITCH ming rank-1 transmissions for which low modulation orders
are used increases in light-load wide-coverage
scenarios, and the coverage capability of the cell
improves. This function requires that the serving RRU
of the cell have power headroom, work in FDD-only
mode, and be configured with a single carrier. This
AdptCellEdgePwrAllocSw: Indicates whether to
enable adaptive power matching. Enabling this
function in a lightly loaded wide coverage area helps
improve the performance of CEUs. This function is
enabled only when this option is selected. This option
GUI Value Range: DlCellCoverEnhanceAl-
goSw(DlCellCoverEnhanceAlgoSw),
AdptCellEdgePwrAllocSw(AdptCellEdgePwrAl-
locSw)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: DlCellCoverEnhanceAlgoSw,
AdptCellEdgePwrAllocSw
Default Value: DlCellCoverEnhanceAlgoSw:off,
AdptCellEdgePwrAllocSw:off

eRAN

nd
CellUlsc Enhance MOD LOFD-0 UL 2x4 Meaning: Indicates whether to enhance uplink MU
hAlgo dVmimo CELLU 01058/ MU- MIMO for non-massive MIMO cells or whether to
Switch LSCHA TDLOF MIMO optimize pairing for uplink MU MIMO to pair more
LGO D-00105 UL 2x8 layers of UEs in massive MIMO cells. This parameter
LST 8 MU- applies only to LTE TDD.
CELLU TDLOF MIMO GUI Value Range: OFF(OFF), ON(ON)
LSCHA D-08120 UL Unit: None
LGO 5 2x64 Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
TDLEO MU-
FD-121 MIMO Default Value: OFF(OFF)
60302 UL 4-
TDLEO Layer
FD-121 MU-
609 MIMO
TDLEO UL 8-
FD-121 Layer
610 MU-
MIMO

eRAN

nd
CellUlsc Vmimo MOD TDLOF UL 2x4 Meaning:

hAlgo OptAlgo CELLU D-00105 MU- Indicates whether to enable MU-MIMO optimization
Switch LSCHA 8 MIMO in the uplink.
LGO TDLOF UL 2x8
LST D-08120 MU- VmimoOptResSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
CELLU 5 MIMO uplink MU-MIMO resource optimization. This option
LSCHA applies only to LTE TDD.
TDLEO UL
LGO FD-121 2x64 HarqVmimoSwitch: Indicates whether UEs that
60302 MU- perform retransmission in the uplink are paired for
TDLEO MIMO MU-MIMO. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
FD-121 UL 4- PreSchVmimoSwitch: Indicates whether pre-
609 Layer scheduled UEs in the uplink are paired for MU-
TDLEO MU- MIMO. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
FD-121 MIMO
610 UL 8- VMIMOResRandomSwitch: Indicates whether to
Layer randomize MU-MIMO resources. This option applies
MU- only to LTE TDD.
MIMO HighSpeedSdmaSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
uplink space division in high-speed railway scenarios.
This option applies only to LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range:
VmimoOptResSwitch(VmimoOptResSwitch),
HarqVmimoSwitch(HarqVmimoSwitch),
PreSchVmimoSwitch(PreSchVmimoSwitch),
VMIMOResRandomSwitch(VMIMOResRandomS-
witch),
HighSpeedSdmaSwitch(HighSpeedSdmaSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: VmimoOptResSwitch,
HarqVmimoSwitch, PreSchVmimoSwitch,
VMIMOResRandomSwitch, HighSpeedSdmaSwitch
Default Value: VmimoOptResSwitch:Off,
HarqVmimoSwitch:Off, PreSchVmimoSwitch:Off,
VMIMOResRandomSwitch:Off,
HighSpeedSdmaSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellUlsc VMIMO MOD TDLOF UL 2x4 Meaning: Indicates the ratio of RBs preferentially
hAlgo EgdeRes CELLU D-00105 MU- allocated to CEUs after VMIMO interference
Ratio LSCHA 8 MIMO coordination is enabled. This parameter applies only
LGO TDLOF UL 2x8 to LTE TDD.
LST D-08120 MU- GUI Value Range: 0~50
CELLU 5 MIMO Unit: %
LSCHA TDLEO UL
LGO Actual Value Range: 0~50
FD-121 2x64
60302 MU- Default Value: 30
TDLEO MIMO
FD-121 UL 4-
609 Layer
TDLEO MU-
FD-121 MIMO
610 UL 8-
Layer
MU-
MIMO
CellAlg UlSuMi MOD LOFD-1 UL SU- Meaning:

oSwitch moAlgo CELLA 30201/ MIMO Indicates whether to enable single-user MIMO in the
Switch LGOSW TDLOF uplink for the cell.
ITCH D-12020
LST 1 ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch: If this option is
CELLA deselected, uplink SU MIMO is disabled, and single-
LGOSW codeword scheduling is performed for all UEs. If this
ITCH option is selected, uplink single-user MIMO is
enabled, and the eNodeB performs dual-codeword
scheduling for SU-MIMO-capable UEs. This option
GUI Value Range:
ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch(ULSUMIMO2LayersSw
itch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch
Default Value: ULSUMIMO2LayersSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg CamcS MOD TDLOF Intra- Meaning:

oSwitch witch CELLA D-11020 eNodeB Indicates whether to enable coordinated AMC for a
LGOSW 5 Uplink cell.
ITCH TDLOF Coordin
LST D-11020 ated UlCamcSw: Indicates whether to enable uplink
CELLA 6 Scheduli coordinated AMC for a cell. This option applies only
LGOSW ng to LTE TDD.
ITCH Inter- UlInterEnbCamcSw: Indicates whether to enable
eNodeB uplink inter-eNodeB coordinated AMC for a cell. This
Uplink option applies only to LTE TDD.
Coordin
ated GUI Value Range: UlCamcSw(UlCamcSw),
Scheduli UlInterEnbCamcSw(UlInterEnbCamcSw)
ng Unit: None
Actual Value Range: UlCamcSw, UlInterEnbCamcSw
Default Value: UlCamcSw:Off,
UlInterEnbCamcSw:Off
ENodeB UlIcicFr MOD TDLBF Uplink Meaning: Indicates whether to enable uplink ICIC in
AlgoSwi eqSwitc ENODE D-00202 Static the frequency domain. If this parameter is set to
tch h BALGO 202 Inter- OFF(Off), uplink ICIC in the frequency domain is
SWITC Cell disabled for cells served by the eNodeB. If this
H Interfere parameter is set to STATIC(Static), uplink static CIC
LST nce in the frequency domain is enabled for cells served by
ENODE Coordin the eNodeB. If this parameter is set to
BALGO ation DYNAMIC(Dynamic), uplink dynamic ICIC in the
SWITC frequency domain is enabled for cells served by the
H eNodeB. If uplink adaptive ICIC is enabled, neither
static nor dynamic ICIC is enabled. This parameter
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), STATIC(Static),
DYNAMIC(Dynamic)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, STATIC, DYNAMIC
Default Value: OFF(Off)
CellUlsc MaxLay MOD TDLOF UL 4x8 Meaning: Indicates the maximum number of layers of
hAlgo erHOV CELLU D-13020 MU- UEs that can be paired for high-order VMIMO. This
MIMO LSCHA 3 MIMO parameter applies only to LTE TDD cells.
LGO GUI Value Range: 2LAYER(2LAYER),
LST 3LAYER(3LAYER), 4LAYER(4LAYER)
CELLU Unit: None
LSCHA
LGO Actual Value Range: 2LAYER, 3LAYER, 4LAYER
Default Value: 4LAYER(4LAYER)

eRAN

nd
CellUlM UlSuMi MOD LOFD-1 UL SU- Meaning: Indicates the rank selection method when
imoPara moRank CELLU 30201/ MIMO the uplink transmission mode is TM2. If this
Cfg Para LMIMO TDLOF parameter is set to FixRank1(FixRank1), only rank 1
PARAC D-12020 transmission can be performed for all UEs in the
FG 1 network. If this parameter is set to
LST FixRank2(FixRank2), only rank 2 transmission can be
CELLU performed for all UEs in the network. If this
LMIMO parameter is set to RankAdaptive(RankAdaptive), the
PARAC eNodeB adaptively selects a rank based on the UE
FG channel quality. This parameter applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: RankAdaptive(RankAdaptive),
FixRank1(FixRank1), FixRank2(FixRank2)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: RankAdaptive, FixRank1,
FixRank2
Default Value: RankAdaptive(RankAdaptive)
SRSCfg SrsCfgP MOD TDLOF Single Meaning: Indicates the SRS configuration policy. This
olicySwi SRSCF D-00104 Streami parameter applies only to LTE TDD.
tch G 9 ng SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO: Indicates the two-
LST TDLOF Beamfor antenna-port SRS configuration policy if two antenna
SRSCF D-00106 ming ports are configured for a UE in the uplink. If this
G 1 Dual option is deselected, the eNodeB preferentially
Streami allocates short-term SRSs (including single-antenna-
TDLOF port SRSs). If this option is selected, the eNodeB
D-12020 ng
Beamfor preferentially allocates two-antenna-port SRSs
1 (including long-term SRSs). SrvBasedSRSAdjAlgo:
ming
TDLEO Indicates whether to enable service-based SRS
FD-121 UL SU- adjustment. If this option is selected, the eNodeB can
601 MIMO adjust SRSs for UEs based on the identified UE
Massive services for SRS adjustment. If this option is
MIMO deselected, the eNodeB does not identify UE services
Introduc for SRS adjustment. This option applies only to LTE
tion TDD.
GUI Value Range:
SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO(SRSPolicyforUL2La
yersMIMO), SrvBasedSRSAdjAl-
go(SrvBasedSRSAdjAlgo)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO,
SrvBasedSRSAdjAlgo
Default Value: SRSPolicyforUL2LayersMIMO:Off,
SrvBasedSRSAdjAlgo:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg UlSchE MOD LOFD-1 Traffic Meaning:

oSwitch xtSwitch CELLA 10205/ Model Indicates whether to enable extended functions of
LGOSW TDLOF Based uplink scheduling.
ITCH D-11022 Perform
LST 7 ance UlPacketLenAwareSchSw: Indicates whether to
CELLA LOFD-0 Optimiz optimize uplink packet length awareness performance.
LGOSW 01048/ ation Packet length awareness performance is optimized in
ITCH TDLOF TTI the uplink only if this option is selected. This option
D-00104 Bundlin applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
8 g EnhExtQCITtiBundlingSwitch: Indicates whether to
LOFD-0 VoIP enable TTI bundling for push-to-talk (PTT) services
01016/ Semi- with QCI 65, QCI 66, or enhanced extended QCIs. If
TDLOF persisten this option is selected, the number of transmission
D-00101 t opportunities increases within the air interface delay
6 Scheduli budget of PTT services, and uplink coverage is
LOFD-0 ng improved. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
81218/ Enhance LTE TDD.
TDLOF d EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch: Indicates whether to
D-11023 Extende enable semi-persistent scheduling during talk spurts of
0 d QCI PTT services with QCI 65, QCI 66, or enhanced
LBFD-0 Dynami extended QCIs. If this option is selected, semi-
0101502 c persistent scheduling is applied. If this option is
/ Scheduli deselected, dynamic scheduling is applied. This option
TDLBF ng applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
D-00101 Basic
502 UlVoipRbRsvSwitch: Indicates whether to reserve
Scheduli PUSCH RBs for UEs running voice services in the
TDLBF ng uplink. This option does not take effect if the uplink
D-00202 AMC cell bandwidth is less than 5 MHz. This option applies
5/ only to LTE FDD.
LBFD-0 MCPTT
02025 Voice UlThpEnhSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
Manage enhanced uplink throughput improvement function. If
TDLBF ment
D-00100 this option is selected, the eNodeB calculates the
6 PUCCH overhead based on the actual number of RBs
occupied by the PUCCH when the number of UEs is
TDLOF small in the cell, which improves the uplink
D-12110 throughput. If this option is deselected, the eNodeB
6 calculates the PUCCH overhead based on the current
PUCCH resource configuration. This option applies
only to LTE TDD.
UlDataFitterRbCalcSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable the algorithm of RB calculation based on
uplink data volume matching. The algorithm takes
effect only when this option and the SchedulerCtrlPo-
werSwitch option of the UlSchSwitch parameter are
selected. When this algorithm takes effect, the number
of required RBs is estimated based on the UE

eRAN

nd
capability and the data volume to be scheduled. If this

algorithm does not take effect, the number of required
RBs is estimated based on the UE spectral efficiency
and the data volume to be scheduled. This option
UlFssOptForAttach: Indicates whether to perform
uplink frequency selective scheduling based on the
value of Interf in the network entry phase. If this
option is selected, uplink frequency selective
scheduling is performed based on the interference
level during network access. If this option is
deselected, uplink frequency selective scheduling is
performed based on the SINR during network access.
This option can be selected when the
ULFSSAlgoSwitch option of the UlSchSwitch
parameter is selected. This option applies only to LTE
TDD.
SrbProbeSchSwitch: Indicates whether to proactively
schedule uplink signaling. If this option is selected,
the eNodeB triggers uplink proactive scheduling for
once when the eNodeB determines that control-plane
data is correctly scheduled in the downlink, the
downlink control-plane data requires uplink control-
plane signaling feedback, and the feedback is not
received within a specified period of time. This option
UlSchCtrlPwrUserSetOptSw: Indicates whether to
enable the algorithm of selecting UE sets for the
scheduler-controlled power function. This algorithm
takes effect only when this option and the
SchedulerCtrlPowerSwitch option of the UlSchSwitch
parameter are selected. When this algorithm takes
effect, pre-scheduled UEs of a lower priority are not
included in the UE set selected by the scheduler.
When this algorithm does not take effect, all pre-
scheduled UEs are included in the UE set selected by
the scheduler. This option applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
UlPttSchOptSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
dynamic scheduling for PTT services with QCI 65,
QCI 66, or enhanced extended QCIs. If this option is
selected, for PTT service UEs that are scheduled
dynamically in the uplink, the eNodeB triggers uplink
dynamic scheduling when the scheduling interval is
greater than the uplink voice scheduling interval
threshold. This ensures timely uplink scheduling for

eRAN

nd
voice service users in heavy traffic scenarios,

preventing packet discarding upon the timeout of
PDCP packet discarding timer. If this option is
deselected, the eNodeB does not trigger uplink
dynamic scheduling for PTT services in the preceding
scenario. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
UlPttDataSizeEstSwitch: Indicates whether to
estimate uplink traffic volume for dynamic scheduling
of PTT services with QCI 65, QCI 66, or enhanced
extended QCIs. If this option is selected, the eNodeB
estimates uplink traffic volume for dynamic
scheduling of PTT services, reducing the packet delay
and packet loss rate and increasing voice quality of
PTT services. If this option is deselected, the function
does not take effect. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
EnhancedSchForSparseSwitch: Indicates whether ping
packets are subject to the preallocation bandwidth
percentage restriction and whether to change the
method of calculating the number of RBs to be
allocated for SR-based dynamic scheduling of ping
packets. If this option is selected, ping packets are not
subject to the preallocation bandwidth percentage
restriction, and the number of RBs to be allocated for
SR-based dynamic scheduling of ping packets is
calculated based on the size of the ping packets. If this
option is deselected, ping packets are subject to the
preallocation bandwidth percentage restriction, and
the number of RBs to be allocated for SR-based
dynamic scheduling of ping packets is calculated
based on the average spectral efficiency. For FDD,
this option indicates only whether ping packets are
subject to the preallocation bandwidth percentage
restriction. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LTE TDD.
UlSigSrSchDateLenAdapt: Indicates whether to
enable data amount adaptation for SR-based
scheduling of uplink signaling. The adaptation is
enabled only if this option is selected. When the
adaptation is enabled, the eNodeB adaptively allocates
the amount of to-be-scheduled data and the number of
RBs based on the signaling identification result in SR-
based scheduling of uplink signaling. This option
UlFssWindSearchDirRandSw: Indicates whether to
randomize the search window direction in uplink

eRAN

nd
frequency selective scheduling. The randomization is

enabled only if this option is selected. When the
randomization is enabled, the eNodeB randomly
specifies a search window direction for a cell in
frequency selective scheduling. This option applies
only to LTE FDD.
UlCellCenterMCSOptSwitch: Indicates whether to
optimize MCSs for uplink transmission by UEs in the
cell center. The optimization is enabled only if this
option is selected. When the optimization is enabled,
the throughput of full-buffer services of UEs in or
near the cell center increases. This option applies only
PuschSchEscPucchSwitch: If this option is selected,
PUCCH interference coordination takes effect,
reducing PUCCH interference. This option applies
only to LTE TDD.
HarqMcsOptSwitch: If this option is selected, the
instantaneous DMRS measurement value can be used
to select an MCS index for retransmission. This option
PreambleSchEnhSwitch: If this option is selected, the
preamble scheduling and demodulation success rates
increase. If this option is deselected, the preamble
scheduling and demodulation success rates do not
increase. If this option is deselected in NB-IoT
scenarios, the maximum backoff index included in
MAC PDU is 12. If this option is selected in NB-IoT
scenarios, the maximum backoff index included in
MAC PDU is 7. This accommodates certain UEs not
supporting higher backoff indexes.
UlPAMCSwitch: If this option is selected, AMC
maximizing the uplink perceived throughput takes
effect and AMC adjustment and MCS index selection
are performed in an optimized way. This option
UlSchRbAllocOptSw: Indicates whether to enable RB
allocation optimization for uplink scheduling. If this
option is selected, PUSCH scheduling considers UE
power status when the uplink resource block (RB)
usage is less than or equal to 30%. In addition, uplink
power control considers SINR fluctuation.
Meanwhile, the scheduling priority precision
increases. If this option is deselected, PUSCH
scheduling does not consider UE power status or RB

eRAN

nd
usage. In addition, uplink power control does not

consider SINR fluctuation. Meanwhile, the scheduling
priority precision decreases. This option applies only
UlMultiClusterSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
uplink multi-cluster function. This function is enabled
only when the option is selected. Uplink
discontinuous resource allocation is supported when
this function is enabled. This option applies only to
LTE FDD.
SrPairingSwitch: Indicates whether SR scheduling is
performed during uplink MU-MIMO pairing. If this
option is selected, SR scheduling is performed during
uplink MU-MIMO pairing. If this option is deselected,
SR scheduling is not performed during uplink MU-
MIMO pairing. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
UlDrbProactiveSchSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable proactive uplink scheduling. If this option is
selected, proactive uplink scheduling is triggered once
when only CQI-only scheduling is performed in the
uplink within a period after downlink data
transmission. If this option is deselected, proactive
uplink scheduling is not triggered. This option applies
GUI Value Range: UlPacketLenAwar-
eSchSw(UlPacketLenAwareSchSw),
EnhExtQCITtiBundlingSwitch(EnhExtQCITtiBund-
lingSwitch), EnhExtQCISpsSchS-
witch(EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch),
UlVoipRbRsvSwitch(UlVoipRbRsvSwitch),
UlThpEnhSwitch(UlThpEnhSwitch),
UlDataFitterRbCalcSwitch(UlDataFitterRbCalcS-
witch), UlFssOptForAttach(UlFssOptForAttach),
SrbProbeSchSwitch(SrbProbeSchSwitch),
UlSchCtrlPwrUserSetOptSw(UlSchCtrlPwrUserSe-
tOptSw), UlPttSchOptSwitch(UlPttSchOptSwitch),
UlPttDataSizeEstSwitch(UlPttDataSizeEstSwitch),
EnhancedSchForSparseSwitch(EnhancedSchForSpar-
seSwitch), UlSigSrSchDateLenA-
dapt(UlSigSrSchDateLenAdapt), UlFssWindSearch-
DirRandSw(UlFssWindSearchDirRandSw),
UlCellCenterMCSOptSwitch(UlCellCenterMCSOptS-
witch), PuschSchEscPucchS-
witch(PuschSchEscPucchSwitch),
HarqMcsOptSwitch(HarqMcsOptSwitch),
PreambleSchEnhSwitch(PreambleSchEnhSwitch),
UlPAMCSwitch(UlPAMCSwitch),

eRAN

nd
UlSchRbAllocOptSw(UlSchRbAllocOptSw),
UlMultiClusterSwitch(UlMultiClusterSwitch),
SrPairingSwitch(SrPairingSwitch),
UlDrbProactiveSchSwitch(UlDrbProactiveSchSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: UlPacketLenAwareSchSw,
EnhExtQCITtiBundlingSwitch, EnhExtQCISpsSchS-
witch, UlVoipRbRsvSwitch, UlThpEnhSwitch,
UlDataFitterRbCalcSwitch, UlFssOptForAttach,
SrbProbeSchSwitch, UlSchCtrlPwrUserSetOptSw,
UlPttSchOptSwitch, UlPttDataSizeEstSwitch,
EnhancedSchForSparseSwitch, UlSigSrSchDateLe-
nAdapt, UlFssWindSearchDirRandSw,
UlCellCenterMCSOptSwitch, PuschSchEscPucchS-
witch, HarqMcsOptSwitch, PreambleSchEnhSwitch,
UlPAMCSwitch, UlSchRbAllocOptSw,
UlMultiClusterSwitch, SrPairingSwitch,
UlDrbProactiveSchSwitch
Default Value: UlPacketLenAwareSchSw:Off,
EnhExtQCITtiBundlingSwitch:Off,
EnhExtQCISpsSchSwitch:Off,
UlVoipRbRsvSwitch:Off, UlThpEnhSwitch:Off,
UlDataFitterRbCalcSwitch:On,
UlFssOptForAttach:Off, SrbProbeSchSwitch:Off,
UlSchCtrlPwrUserSetOptSw:Off,
UlPttSchOptSwitch:Off, UlPttDataSizeEstSwitch:Off,
EnhancedSchForSparseSwitch:Off,
UlSigSrSchDateLenAdapt:Off, UlFssWindSearchDir-
RandSw:Off, UlCellCenterMCSOptSwitch:Off,
PuschSchEscPucchSwitch:Off,
HarqMcsOptSwitch:Off, PreambleSchEnhSwitch:Off,
UlPAMCSwitch:Off, UlSchRbAllocOptSw:Off,
UlMultiClusterSwitch:Off, SrPairingSwitch:On,
UlDrbProactiveSchSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg TurboRe MOD LOFD-1 Turbo Meaning:

oSwitch ceiverS CELLA 20201/ Receiver Indicates whether to enable algorithms related to turbo
witch LGOSW TDLOF receiver.
ITCH D-12020
LST 2 The value OFF indicates that the turbo receiver
CELLA algorithm and enhanced turbo receiver algorithm are
LGOSW disabled.This parameter applies only to LTE FDD and
ITCH LTE TDD.
The value ON indicates that the turbo receiver
algorithm is enabled for UEs with an MCS index
lower than 9.This parameter applies only to LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
The value ENHANCED_TURBO_RECEIVER_ON
indicates that the enhanced turbo receiver algorithm is
enabled. In this case, the enhanced turbo receiver
algorithm is enabled for UEs with an uplink MCS
index lower than 9 and for non-64QAM UEs with an
uplink MCS index higher than or equal to 9. For LTE
TDD, this algorithm applies only to 1T1R, 2T2R, and
4T4R.
TDD.
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On),
ENHANCED_TURBO_RECEIVER_ON(ENHANCE
D_TURBO_RECEIVER_ON)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON,
ENHANCED_TURBO_RECEIVER_ON
Default Value: OFF(Off)

eRAN

nd
CellAlg UplinkIc MOD LOFD-1 Intra- Meaning:

oSwitch Switch CELLA 20202 eNodeB Indicates whether to enable uplink interference
LGOSW and cancellation (IC) in the cell. This parameter applies
ITCH Inter- only to LTE FDD.
LST eNodeB
CELLA Uplink UlInterSiteIcSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
LGOSW Interfere uplink inter-eNodeB IC. Uplink inter-eNodeB IC is
ITCH nce enabled only if this option is selected.
Cancella
tion UlIntraSiteIcSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
uplink intra-eNodeB IC. Uplink intra-eNodeB IC is
enabled only if this option is selected.
GUI Value Range:
UlInterSiteIcSwitch(UlInterSiteIcSwitch),
UlIntraSiteIcSwitch(UlIntraSiteIcSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: UlInterSiteIcSwitch,
UlIntraSiteIcSwitch
Default Value: UlInterSiteIcSwitch:Off,
UlIntraSiteIcSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg DlComp MOD TDLAO Inter- Meaning:

oSwitch Switch CELLA FD-081 eNodeB Indicates whether to enable the DL CoMP algorithm.
LGOSW 411 DL
ITCH LAOFD CoMP If the IntraDlCompSwitch option is selected and the
LST -120201 Based InterDlCompDcsSwitch and InterDlCompCbfSwitch
CELLA on options are deselected, intra-BBP adaptive DL CoMP
LGOSW Relaxed is enabled, and the eNodeB adaptively selects DCS,
ITCH Backhau CBF, or JT as the transmission mode.
l
If the IntraDlCompSwitch and InterDlCompDcsS-
DL witch options are selected and the InterDlCompCbfS-
CoMP witch option is deselected, intra-BBP adaptive DL
CoMP, inter-BBP DCS, and inter-eNodeB DCS are
enabled.
If the IntraDlCompSwitch, InterDlCompDcsSwitch,
and InterDlCompCbfSwitch options are selected,
intra-BBP adaptive DL CoMP, inter-BBP adaptive DL
CoMP, and inter-eNodeB adaptive DL CoMP are
enabled.
In inter-BBP and inter-eNodeB adaptive DL CoMP,
the eNodeB adaptively selects DCS or CBF as the
transmission mode. The IntraDlCompSwitch,
InterDlCompDcsSwitch, and InterDlCompCbfSwitch
options apply only to LTE TDD.
FDDHomNetDlCompSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable DL CoMP in a homogeneous network
(consisting of only macro or micro cells) under a
Cloud BB architecture. DL CoMP is enabled in such a
network only if this option is selected. This option
FDDHetNetDlCompSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable DL CoMP in a heterogeneous network
(consisting of macro and micro cells) under a Cloud
BB architecture. DL CoMP is enabled in such a
network only if this option is selected. This option
IntraDlCompJtSwitch: Indicates whether to enable the
intra-eNodeB SU-JT algorithm. If this option is
selected, intra-BBP SU-JT is enabled. If this option is
deselected, intra-BBP SU-JT is disabled. This option
GUI Value Range:
IntraDlCompSwitch(IntraDlCompSwitch),
InterDlCompDcsSwitch(InterDlCompDcsSwitch),
InterDlCompCbfSwitch(InterDlCompCbfSwitch),
FDDHomNetDlCompSwitch(FDDHomNetDlCompS-

eRAN

nd
witch), FDDHetNetDlCompS-
witch(FDDHetNetDlCompSwitch),
IntraDlCompJtSwitch(IntraDlCompJtSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: IntraDlCompSwitch,
InterDlCompDcsSwitch, InterDlCompCbfSwitch,
FDDHomNetDlCompSwitch, FDDHetNetDlCompS-
witch, IntraDlCompJtSwitch
Default Value: IntraDlCompSwitch:Off,
InterDlCompDcsSwitch:Off, InterDlCompCbfS-
witch:Off, FDDHomNetDlCompSwitch:Off,
FDDHetNetDlCompSwitch:Off,
IntraDlCompJtSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CaMgtC CellCaA MOD MRFD- FDD Meaning:

fg lgoSwitc CAMG 101231 +TDD Indicates whether to enable cell-level CA. This
h TCFG MRFD- Downlin parameter provides the following options:
LST 101222 k
CAMG Carrier CaDl3CCSwitch(CaDl3CCSwitch): indicates whether
LAOFD Aggrega
TCFG to enable aggregation of three component carriers in
-001001 tion the downlink. This type of aggregation works only if
/ (LTE this option is selected and at least two SccFreqCfg
TDLAO TDD) MOs or three CaGroupCell MOs are configured. This
FD-001
FDD option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
001
+TDD
LAOFD Downlin CaUl2CCSwitch(CaUl2CCSwitch): indicates whether
-070201 k to enable aggregation of two component carriers in the
/ Carrier uplink. This type of aggregation works only if this
TDLAO Aggrega option is selected and at least one SccFreqCfg MO or
FD-070 tion two CaGroupCell MOs are configured. This option
201 (LTE applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
LAOFD FDD) CaDl4CCSwitch(CaDl4CCSwitch): indicates whether
-080202 LTE-A to enable aggregation of four component carriers in
/ Introduc the downlink. This type of aggregation works only if
TDLAO tion this option is selected and at least three SccFreqCfg
FD-081 MOs or four CaGroupCell MOs are configured. This
Flexible
407 option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
CA
LAOFD from
-080207 Multiple InterFddTddCaSwitch(InterFddTddCaSwitch):
Carriers indicates whether to enable aggregation of TDD and
TDLAO
FDD component carriers. This type of aggregation
FD-081 Carrier works only if this option is selected. In a combination
405 Aggrega of FDD and TDD cells for CA, either an FDD cell or a
LAOFD tion for TDD cell can act as the PCell. This option applies
-080208 Uplink only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
2CC
MRFD-
111222 Carrier 2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch(2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch):
Aggrega indicates whether to enable enhanced DL ACK
MRFD- demodulation when two component carriers are
tion for
111232 aggregated. If this option is selected, DL ACK
Downlin
LEOFD- k 3CC demodulation is enhanced, increasing the downlink
110303/ in throughput of UEs using CA. However, there might be
TDLEO 40MHz an impact on the uplink, because PUCCH format 3
FD-081 increases the UE transmit power. If this option is
Carrier
504 deselected, PUCCH format 1b with channel selection
Aggrega
LCOFD is used. As a result, a large number of bit errors occur,
tion for
-131312 decreasing downlink throughput of CA UEs. This
Downlin
TDLCO k 3CC
FD-131 Carrier CaDl5CCSwitch(CaDl5CCSwitch): indicates whether
312 Aggrega to enable aggregation of five component carriers in
tion for the downlink. This type of aggregation works only if
Downlin this option is selected and at least four SccFreqCfg

eRAN

nd
MRFD- k 3CC MOs or five CaGroupCell MOs are configured. This

131122 in option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
MRFD- 60MHz
CaInstantlyJudgeSwitch(CaInstantlyJudgeSwitch):
131132 FDD
indicates whether to use instantaneous millisecond-
+TDD
level values or filtered second-level values to evaluate
Uplink
SCell activation based on traffic volume. If this option
Carrier
is selected, instantaneous values are used. If this
Aggrega
option is deselected, filtered values are used. This
tion(LT
E FDD)
FDD LaaCaDlSwitch(LaaCaDlSwitch): indicates whether
+TDD to enable downlink licensed-assisted access (LAA)
Uplink CA. This option applies only to LampSite eNodeBs.
Carrier Downlink LAA CA is enabled only if this option is
Aggrega selected. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
tion LTE TDD.
(LTE
TDD) FddTddCaUlServiceFirstSwitch(FddTddCaUlService-
FirstSwitch): indicates whether to prioritize uplink
Carrier
services for a UE in both uplink and downlink CA
Aggrega
states. When a UE performs CA in both the uplink and
tion for
downlink in a cell, the eNodeB preferentially
Downlin
guarantees uplink throughput of the UE only if this
k 4CC
option is selected. Deselecting this option has no
and 5CC
impact on network performance. This option applies
LTE to FDD-only CA, TDD-only CA, and FDD+TDD CA.
Spectru This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
m
Coordin RcvA2CfgSccSwitch(RcvA2CfgSccSwitch): indicates
ation whether the eNodeB allows SCell configuration for
(LTE CA UEs after receiving A2 measurement reports from
FDD) the UEs. SCell configuration is allowed only if this
LTE option is selected. This option applies only to LTE
Spectru FDD and LTE TDD.
m Dc3cSwitch(Dc3cSwitch): indicates whether to enable
Coordin dual connectivity (DC) in the option-3C architecture.
ation If this option is selected, DC in the option-3C
(LTE architecture is enabled, and the local cell can serve as
TDD) a PCell or PSCell in DC. If this option is deselected,
NSA this function is disabled. This option applies only to
Network LTE FDD.
ing
based on MultiCarrierFlexCaSwitch(MultiCarrierFlexCaS-
EPC(LT witch): indicates whether to enable flexible CA.
E FDD) Flexible CA is enabled in the cell only if this option is
NSA selected. This option takes effect only in frequency-
Network based CA. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
ing LTE TDD.

eRAN

nd
based on NackDtxIdentifySwitch(NackDtxIdentifySwitch):
EPC(LT indicates whether the eNodeB regards NACK/DTX
E TDD) confusions as DTXs or NACKs during PUSCH
demodulation. When this option is selected, the
eNodeB regards NACK/DTX confusions as DTXs.
When this option is deselected, the eNodeB regards
NACK/DTX confusions as NACKs. This option
CaDl2CCExtSwitch(CaDl2CCExtSwitch): indicates
whether to enable downlink 2CC CA on extended
bandwidth. Downlink FDD 2CC CA can reach an
aggregated bandwidth between 20 MHz and 40 MHz
(inclusive) and downlink TDD 2CC CA can reach an
(inclusive) only if this option is selected. To use this
CA feature, operators must select this option
regardless of whether the local cell acts as a PCell or
an SCell for a UE. This option takes effect only in
adaptive (frequency-based) configuration mode. This
CaDl3CCExtSwitch(CaDl3CCExtSwitch): indicates
whether to enable downlink 3CC CA on extended
bandwidth. Downlink FDD 3CC CA can reach an
(inclusive) only if this option is selected. To use this
CA feature, operators must select this option
regardless of whether the local cell acts as a PCell or
an SCell for a UE. This option takes effect only in
adaptive (frequency-based) configuration mode. This
VolteSupportCaInterFreqMeasSw(VolteSupportCaIn-
terFreqMeasSw): indicates whether VoLTE UEs can
perform inter-frequency measurements for SCell
configuration or PCC anchoring for connected-mode
UEs. The eNodeB delivers inter-frequency
measurement configurations to CA UEs running
VoLTE services for SCell configuration or PCC
anchoring only if this option is selected. To enable the
eNodeB to configure NR SCGs based on gap-assisted
inter-frequency measurements for UEs with
concurrent VoLTE and data services, select this
option. This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
TDD.
CaEnhAperiodicCqiRptSwitch: indicates the aperiodic
CQI reporting mechanism in CA. If this option is
selected, then:

eRAN

nd
- When the MIMO mode of the PCell or SCells is

closed-loop, enhanced aperiodic CQI reporting is used
for active CA UEs that treat the local cell as their
PCell.
- When the IE simultaneousAckNackAndCQI-
Format3-r11 is set to "False" for CA UEs, the CA UEs
are not configured to perform periodic CQI reporting
of SCells in closed-loop MIMO mode.
If this option is deselected, this function is disabled. If
both this option and the EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch
option are selected, the CQI reporting mechanism for
the PCell follows the EnAperiodicCqiRptSwitch
option setting and that for the SCells follows this
option setting. If both this option and the
SccCqiRptEnhancedSwitch option are selected, the
CQI reporting mechanism follows the
CaEnhAperiodicCqiRptSwitch option setting. This
SpectrumCoordinationSwitch(SpectrumCoordina-
tionSwitch): Spectrum coordination is enabled only if
this option is selected. With spectrum coordination
enabled, PCell changes are triggered based on uplink
quality. This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
TDD.
VolteUlCaControlSwitch(VolteUlCaControlSwitch):
If this option is selected, the eNodeB is not allowed to
configure uplink TDD SCells for CA UEs that treat
FDD cells as their PCells and are running VoLTE
services. In addition, for CA UEs in the FDD+TDD
CA state configured with uplink TDD SCells, the
eNodeB removes the uplink TDD SCells for the CA
UEs before it can set up VoLTE services. If this option
is deselected, the eNodeB is allowed to configure
uplink TDD SCells for these CA UEs. This option
GUI Value Range:
CaDl3CCSwitch(CaDl3CCSwitch),
CaUl2CCSwitch(CaUl2CCSwitch),
CaDl4CCSwitch(CaDl4CCSwitch),
InterFddTddCaSwitch(InterFddTddCaSwitch),
2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch(2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch),
CaDl5CCSwitch(CaDl5CCSwitch), CaInstantlyJudg-
eSwitch(CaInstantlyJudgeSwitch),
LaaCaDlSwitch(LaaCaDlSwitch), FddTddCaUlServi-
ceFirstSwitch(FddTddCaUlServiceFirstSwitch),
RcvA2CfgSccSwitch(RcvA2CfgSccSwitch),

eRAN

nd
Dc3cSwitch(Dc3cSwitch), MultiCarrierFlexCaS-
witch(MultiCarrierFlexCaSwitch), NackDtxIdentify-
Switch(NackDtxIdentifySwitch),
CaDl2CCExtSwitch(CaDl2CCExtSwitch),
CaDl3CCExtSwitch(CaDl3CCExtSwitch),
VolteSupportCaInterFreqMeasSw(VolteSupportCaIn-
terFreqMeasSw), CaEnhAperiodicCqiRptS-
witch(CaEnhAperiodicCqiRptSwitch),
SpectrumCoordinationSwitch(SpectrumCoordina-
tionSwitch), VolteUlCaControlS-
witch(VolteUlCaControlSwitch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: CaDl3CCSwitch,
CaUl2CCSwitch, CaDl4CCSwitch,
InterFddTddCaSwitch, 2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch,
CaDl5CCSwitch, CaInstantlyJudgeSwitch,
LaaCaDlSwitch, FddTddCaUlServiceFirstSwitch,
RcvA2CfgSccSwitch, Dc3cSwitch, MultiCarrierFlex-
CaSwitch, NackDtxIdentifySwitch,
CaDl2CCExtSwitch, CaDl3CCExtSwitch,
VolteSupportCaInterFreqMeasSw, CaEnhAperiodicC-
qiRptSwitch, SpectrumCoordinationSwitch,
VolteUlCaControlSwitch
Default Value: CaDl3CCSwitch:Off,
CaUl2CCSwitch:Off, CaDl4CCSwitch:Off,
InterFddTddCaSwitch:Off,
2CCDlCaEnhanceSwitch:Off, CaDl5CCSwitch:Off,
CaInstantlyJudgeSwitch:Off, LaaCaDlSwitch:Off,
FddTddCaUlServiceFirstSwitch:Off,
RcvA2CfgSccSwitch:Off, Dc3cSwitch:Off,
MultiCarrierFlexCaSwitch:Off, NackDtxIdentify-
Switch:Off, CaDl2CCExtSwitch:Off,
CaDl3CCExtSwitch:Off, VolteSupportCaInterFreq-
MeasSw:Off, CaEnhAperiodicCqiRptSwitch:Off,
SpectrumCoordinationSwitch:Off,
VolteUlCaControlSwitch:Off

eRAN

nd
CellAlg AvoidInt MOD MRFD- GSM Meaning:

oSwitch erfSwitc CELLA 231808 and LTE Indicates whether to enable interference avoidance for
h LGOSW MRFD- Buffer a cell.
ITCH 101221 Zone
LST Optimiz AvoidGeranInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
LOFD-1 ation(LT the GSM and LTE buffer zone optimization feature. If
CELLA 11205
LGOSW E) this option is selected, the feature is enabled. Before
ITCH TDLOF UL selecting this option, pay attention to the following: 1.
D-08121 Refarmi To modify the uplink and downlink cell bandwidth for
7 ng Zero an LTE cell in advance, expand the cell bandwidth to
TDLEO Bufferzo the immediate higher level of standard bandwidths.
FD-130 ne For example, the bandwidth of a 15 MHz cell must be
501 changed to 20 MHz. 2. It is recommended that this
CDMA option be deselected if the cell bandwidth is 1.4 MHz,
and LTE 3 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. 3. To avoid co-channel
Zero interference to the PUCCH from GERAN cells, select
Bufferzo the PucchFlexCfgSwitch option of the
ne (LTE PucchAlgoSwitch parameter.
FDD)
Interfere TddAvoidUpPTSInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to
nce enable UpPTS interference detection and avoidance. If
Detectio this option is selected, UpPTS interference detection
n and and avoidance are enabled for LTE TDD.
Suppres AvoidPrachInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
sion PRACH interference avoidance in the frequency
Inter- domain. If this option is selected, PRACH interference
Cell DL avoidance in the frequency domain is enabled for LTE
D- TDD.
MIMO
AvoidUtranInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to
optimize the UMTS and LTE buffer zone optimization
feature. If this option is selected, the feature is
enabled. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
IntraBandInterfMonitorSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable in-band interference monitoring. If this option
is selected, in-band interference monitoring is enabled
for a cell. If this option is deselected, in-band
interference monitoring is disabled for the cell. The
setting of this option does not take effect for LTE
TDD cells established on LBBPc boards or LTE FDD
cells established on LBBPc and LBBPd boards.
AvoidSpurEmissInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable spurious interference avoidance. If this option
is selected, spurious interference avoidance is enabled.
This option applies only to LTE FDD.
UlInterfSuppressionSwitch: Indicates whether to
automatically adjust uplink power control parameters

eRAN

nd
based on interference and perform conservative

scheduling for access signaling. If this option is
selected, uplink power control parameters are
automatically adjusted based on interference, and
conservative scheduling is performed for access
signaling. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
AvoidCDMAInterfSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
the CDMA and LTE zero buffer zone feature. It is
recommended that this option be selected at the buffer
zone of CDMA and LTE refarming. Because of
frequency band differences between RATs, the CDMA
and LTE zero buffer zone feature is mutually
exclusive with the GL DSS, GSM and LTE zero
buffer zone, and UMTS and LTE buffer zone
optimization features. You are advised not to enable
CDMA and LTE zero buffer zone with GL DSS, GSM
and LTE zero buffer zone, or UMTS and LTE buffer
zone optimization. This option applies only to LTE
FDD.
AvoidCrsConflictInterfSw: Indicates whether to
enable interference avoidance optimization when CRS
conflicts occur due to inter-cell D-MIMO. If this
option is selected, interference avoidance optimization
is enabled when CRS conflicts occur. If this option is
deselected, interference avoidance optimization is
disabled when CRS conflicts occur. This option
applies only to LTE TDD. To deploy inter-cell D-
MIMO, PCIs must be replanned, which causes
interference due to CRS conflicts. It is recommended
that this option be selected if inter-cell D-MIMO
causes CRS conflicts and be deselected in other CRS
conflict scenarios.
GUI Value Range: AvoidGeranInterfS-
witch(AvoidGeranInterfSwitch), TddAvoidUpPTSIn-
terfSwitch(TddAvoidUpPTSInterfSwitch),
AvoidPrachInterfSwitch(AvoidPrachInterfSwitch),
AvoidUtranInterfSwitch(AvoidUtranInterfSwitch),
IntraBandInterfMonitorSwitch(IntraBandInterfMoni-
torSwitch), AvoidSpurEmissInterfS-
witch(AvoidSpurEmissInterfSwitch), UlInterfSuppres-
sionSwitch(UlInterfSuppressionSwitch),
AvoidCDMAInterfSwitch(AvoidCDMAInterfSwitch),
AvoidCrsConflictInterfSw(AvoidCrsConflictInterfSw)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: AvoidGeranInterfSwitch,
TddAvoidUpPTSInterfSwitch, AvoidPrachInterfS-
witch, AvoidUtranInterfSwitch, IntraBandInterfMoni-

eRAN

nd
torSwitch, AvoidSpurEmissInterfSwitch,
UlInterfSuppressionSwitch, AvoidCDMAInterfS-
witch, AvoidCrsConflictInterfSw
Default Value: AvoidGeranInterfSwitch:Off,
TddAvoidUpPTSInterfSwitch:Off,
AvoidPrachInterfSwitch:Off, AvoidUtranInterfS-
witch:Off, IntraBandInterfMonitorSwitch:Off,
AvoidSpurEmissInterfSwitch:Off, UlInterfSuppres-
sionSwitch:Off, AvoidCDMAInterfSwitch:Off,
AvoidCrsConflictInterfSw:Off

eRAN

nd
Cell Subfram ADD LBFD-0 Broadca Meaning: Indicates the ratio of UL subframes to DL
eAssign CELL 02009/ st of subframes in a TDD cell. For details, see 3GPP TS
ment MOD TDLBF system 36.211. This parameter applies only to LTE TDD.
CELL D-00200 informat GUI Value Range: SA0(SA0), SA1(SA1), SA2(SA2),
9 ion SA3(SA3), SA4(SA4), SA5(SA5), SA6(SA6),
LST
CELL TDLBF Basic NULL(NULL)
D-00100 uplink- Unit: None
7 downlin
k Actual Value Range: SA0, SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4,
TDLBF SA5, SA6, NULL
D-00100 subfram
701 e Default Value: SA0(SA0)
configur
TDLBF ation
D-00100
702 uplink-
downlin
TDLOF k
D-00102 subfram
6 e
TDLOF configur
D-00102 ation
601 type1&2
TDLOF uplink-
D-00102 downlin
602 k special
TDLOF subfram
D-00102 e
603 configur
ation
type 7
Optional
uplink-
downlin
k
subfram
e
configur
ation
uplink-
downlin
k
subfram
e
configur
ation
type 0
uplink-
downlin

eRAN

nd
k special
subfram
e
configur
ation
type 4
uplink-
downlin
k special
subfram
e
configur
ation
type 5
Cell MultiRr ADD LOFD-0 SFN Meaning: Indicates the type of the multi-RRU cell.
uCellMo CELL 03029/ Adaptiv GUI Value Range: SFN(SFN),
de MOD TDLOF e SFN/ CELL_COMBINATION(Cell Combination),
CELL D-00107 SDMA TWO_RRU_COMBINATION(TWO RRU
5 Combination), DIGITAL_COMBINATION(Cell
LST Inter-
CELL LOFD-0 BBP Digital Combination),
70205/ SFN MPRU_AGGREGATION(MPRU_AGGREGATION)
TDLOF Unit: None
D-00200 Inter-
8 eNodeB Actual Value Range: SFN, CELL_COMBINATION,
SFN TWO_RRU_COMBINATION,
TDLOF Based DIGITAL_COMBINATION,
D-00109 on MPRU_AGGREGATION
8 Coordin Default Value: SFN(SFN)
TDLOF ated
D-00108 eNodeB
0 Inter-
TDLOF BBP
D-00108 Adaptiv
1 e SFN/
TDLOF SDMA
D-00108 Inter-
2 eNodeB
Adaptiv
e SFN/
SDMA
Based
on
Coordin
ated
eNodeB

eRAN

nd
CellPdc Epdcch MOD LBFD-0 Physical Meaning: Indicates whether to enable algorithms
chAlgo AlgoSwi CELLP 02003/ Channel related to the EPDCCH. EpdcchFunctionSwitch:
tch DCCHA TDLBF Manage Indicates whether to support EPDCCH. If this option
LGO D-00200 ment is selected, EPDCCH is supported. This option applies
LST 3 only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
CELLP GUI Value Range: EpdcchFunctionS-
DCCHA witch(EpdcchFunctionSwitch)
LGO Unit: None
Actual Value Range: EpdcchFunctionSwitch
Default Value: EpdcchFunctionSwitch:Off
SRSCfg SrsCfgI MOD LBFD-0 Physical Meaning: Indicates whether to configure sounding
nd SRSCF 02003/ Channel reference signal (SRS) resources for UEs in a cell.
G TDLBF Manage The value BOOLEAN_TRUE indicates that SRS
LST D-00200 ment resources are available in the cell and can be
SRSCF 3 Virtual configured for UEs in the cell. The value
G LEOFD- 4T4R BOOLEAN_FALSE indicates that no SRS resource is
111305 available in the cell, and therefore no UE in the cell is
DL 4- configured with SRS resources. This parameter does
TDLAO Layer not take effect on: (1) FDD cell that is established on
FD-081 MIMO an LBBPc and uses four or more RX antennas. (2)
409 Based FDD cell that is established on an LBBPc and uses
TDLEO on TM9 extended cyclic prefix (CP) in the uplink. (3) TDD
FD-121 DL cell established on an LBBPc. If this parameter does
615 Flexible not take effect on a cell but SRS resources are
TDLOF 3D- available in the cell, SRS resources can be configured
D-00104 Beamfor for UEs in the cell. This parameter applies only to
9 ming LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
Single GUI Value Range: BOOLEAN_FALSE(False),
Streami BOOLEAN_TRUE(True)
ng Unit: None
Beamfor
ming Actual Value Range: BOOLEAN_FALSE,
BOOLEAN_TRUE
Default Value: BOOLEAN_TRUE(True)

eRAN

nd
SRSCfg FddSrsC MOD LBFD-0 Physical Meaning: Indicates the allocation mode of sounding
fgMode SRSCF 02003 Channel reference signal (SRS) resources in LTE FDD. This
G LEOFD- Manage parameter must be set when the SrsCfgInd parameter
LST 111305 ment is set to BOOLEAN_TRUE(True). If the
SRSCF Virtual FddSrsCfgMode parameter is set to
G 4T4R DEFAULTMODE(Default Mode), SRS resource
allocation is activated by default after a cell is
established, and SRS resources are allocated to UEs
that access the cell. If this parameter is set to
ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode), SRS resource
allocation can be adaptively activated or deactivated
based on the cell load. After this parameter is set to
ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode), settings of
parameters SrsAlgoSwitch, SrsSubframeCfg, and
UserSrsPeriod do not take effect. The parameter value
ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode) is recommended
in heavy-traffic scenarios where there is a large
number of UEs in the cell. The parameter value
ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode) does not apply
to cells established on an LBBPc. This parameter
GUI Value Range: DEFAULTMODE(Default Mode),
ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: DEFAULTMODE,
ADAPTIVEMODE
Default Value: ADAPTIVEMODE(Adaptive Mode)

eRAN

nd
RlcPdcp CaUeRl ADD LBFD-0 Radio Meaning:

ParaGro cParaAd RLCPD 02008/ Bearer Indicates the adaptive threshold used to determine
up ptiveTh CPPAR TDLBF Manage which RLC parameters are valid for CA UEs.
d AGROU D-00200 ment
P 8 LTE-A When the number of UEs connected to the PCell of a
MOD LAOFD Introduc CA UE exceeds the threshold, the following
RLCPD -001001 tion parameters take effect on non-GBR bearers in RLC
CPPAR AM for the CA UE: UeAmReorderingTimer,
AGROU ENodeBAmReorderingTimer, UeStatusProhibitTimer,
P and ENodeBStatusProhibitTimer. When the number
does not exceed the threshold, the following
LST parameters take effect:
RLCPD
CPPAR For the UE in the intra-eNodeB 2CC or 3CC CA state,
AGROU in the eNodeB-coordination-based 2CC or 3CC state,
P or in the relaxed-backhaul-based inter-eNodeB CA
state:
- CaUeReorderingTimer or UeAmReorderingTimer,
whichever parameter with a smaller value
- CaUeReorderingTimer or ENodeBAmReordering-
Timer, whichever parameter with a smaller value
- CaUeStatProhTimer or UeStatusProhibitTimer,
- CaUeStatProhTimer or ENodeBStatusProhibitTimer,
For UE in the intra-eNodeB 4CC or 5CC CA state or
in the eNodeB-coordination-based 4CC or 5CC state:
- Dl4cc5ccUeReorderingTimer or
UeAmReorderingTimer, whichever parameter with a
smaller value
- CaUeReorderingTimer or ENodeBAmReordering-
Timer, whichever parameter with a smaller value
- Dl4cc5ccUeStatProhTimer or UeStatusProhibitTim-
er, whichever parameter with a smaller value
- CaUeStatProhTimer or ENodeBStatusProhibitTimer,
TDD.
GUI Value Range: 0~65535
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~65535

eRAN

nd
Default Value: 0
RlcPdcp CaUeRe ADD LBFD-0 Radio Meaning: Indicates the length of the reordering timer
ParaGro ordering RLCPD 02008/ Bearer that applies to non-GBR bearers in RLC AM for CA
up Timer CPPAR TDLBF Manage UEs in the 2CC CA, 3CC CA, and relaxed-backhaul-
AGROU D-00200 ment based CA states in their PCell when the number of
P 8 LTE-A UEs in RRC_CONNECTED mode does not exceed
MOD LAOFD Introduc the value of CaUeRlcParaAdptiveThd. This option
RLCPD -001001 tion applies only to LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
CPPAR GUI Value Range: Treordering_m0(0),
AGROU Treordering_m5(5), Treordering_m10(10),
P Treordering_m15(15), Treordering_m20(20),
LST Treordering_m25(25), Treordering_m30(30),
RLCPD Treordering_m35(35), Treordering_m40(40),
CPPAR Treordering_m45(45), Treordering_m50(50),
AGROU Treordering_m55(55), Treordering_m60(60),
P Treordering_m65(65), Treordering_m70(70),
Treordering_m75(75), Treordering_m80(80),
Treordering_m190(190), Treordering_m200(200)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Treordering_m0,
Treordering_m5, Treordering_m10, Treordering_m15,
Treordering_m20, Treordering_m25,
Treordering_m200
Default Value: Treordering_m20(20)

eRAN

nd
RlcPdcp CaUeSta ADD LBFD-0 Radio Meaning: Indicates the length of the status reporting
ParaGro tProhTi RLCPD 02008/ Bearer prohibition timer that applies to non-GBR bearers in
up mer CPPAR TDLBF Manage RLC AM for CA UEs in the 2CC CA, 3CC CA, and
AGROU D-00200 ment relaxed-backhaul-based CA states in their PCell when
P 8 LTE-A the number of UEs in RRC_CONNECTED mode
MOD LAOFD Introduc does not exceed the value of CaUeRlcParaAdpti-
RLCPD -001001 tion veThd. This option applies only to LTE FDD and LTE
CPPAR TDD.
AGROU GUI Value Range: m0(0), m5(5), m10(10), m15(15),
P m20(20), m25(25), m30(30), m35(35), m40(40),
LST m45(45), m50(50), m55(55), m60(60), m65(65),
RLCPD m70(70), m75(75), m80(80), m85(85), m90(90),
CPPAR m95(95), m100(100), m105(105), m110(110),
AGROU m115(115), m120(120), m125(125), m130(130),
P m135(135), m140(140), m145(145), m150(150),
m155(155), m160(160), m165(165), m170(170),
m175(175), m180(180), m185(185), m190(190),
m195(195), m200(200), m205(205), m210(210),
m215(215), m220(220), m225(225), m230(230),
m235(235), m240(240), m245(245), m250(250),
m300(300), m350(350), m400(400), m450(450),
m500(500)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: m0, m5, m10, m15, m20, m25,
m30, m35, m40, m45, m50, m55, m60, m65, m70,
m75, m80, m85, m90, m95, m100, m105, m110,
m115, m120, m125, m130, m135, m140, m145,
m150, m155, m160, m165, m170, m175, m180,
m185, m190, m195, m200, m205, m210, m215,
m220, m225, m230, m235, m240, m245, m250,
m300, m350, m400, m450, m500
Default Value: m20(20)

eRAN

nd
CellAlg UlPcAlg MOD LBFD-0 Uplink Meaning:

oSwitch oSwitch CELLA 02026/ Power Indicates whether to enable power control for the
LGOSW TDLBF Control PUSCH or PUCCH. This parameter includes the
ITCH D-00202 PUCCH following options:
LST 6 Outer
CELLA LBFD-0 Loop CloseLoopSpsSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
LGOSW 81101/ Power closed-loop power control for the PUSCH in semi-
ITCH TDLBF Control persistent scheduling mode. If this option is selected,
D-08110 TPC commands are adjusted based on correctness of
Virtual the received initial-transmission packets to decrease
4 4T4R the IBLER. This option applies only to LTE FDD and
LEOFD- Enhance LTE TDD.
111305 d Uplink
TDLOF Power InnerLoopPuschSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
D-08123 Control inner-loop power control for the PUSCH in dynamic
2 scheduling mode. Inner-loop power control for the
PUSCH in dynamic scheduling mode is enabled only
when this option is selected. This option applies only
InnerLoopPucchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
inner-loop power control for the PUCCH. Inner-loop
power control for the PUCCH is enabled only when
this option is selected. This option applies only to LTE
FDD and LTE TDD.
CloseLoopOptPUSCHSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable the optimization on closed-loop power control
for the PUSCH in dynamic scheduling mode. The
optimization is enabled only when this option is
selected. This option applies only to LTE TDD.
PucchPcDtxSinrSwitch: Indicates whether the
eNodeB processes the measured uplink SINR in the
DTX state when the PUCCH DTX is detected. If this
option is deselected, the eNodeB does not process the
measured uplink SINR in the DTX state when the
PUCCH DTX is detected. If this option is selected, the
eNodeB processes the measured uplink SINR even
when PUCCH DTX is detected, generates power
control commands based on the SINR, and delivers
the power control commands to UEs. This option
PuschIoTCtrlSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
interference control in closed-loop power control for
the PUSCH in dynamic scheduling mode. Interference
control in closed-loop power control for the PUSCH
in dynamic scheduling mode is enabled only when

eRAN

nd
this option is selected. This option applies only to LTE

FDD and LTE TDD.
SrsPcSwitch: Indicates whether to enable SRS power
control adjustment. SRS power control adjustment is
enabled only when this option is selected. This option
NearPointUeOptPUSCHSwitch: Indicates whether to
apply optimized closed-loop power control for the
PUSCH to UEs in the cell center. The optimization
helps UEs in the cell center to prevent unnecessary
power lowering due to inter-RAT or abrupt
interference. Optimized closed-loop power control for
the PUSCH is applied to UEs in the cell center only
when this option is selected. This option applies only
to LTE FDD.
PuschRsrpHighThdSwitch: Indicates whether closed-
loop power control for the PUSCH limits the
maximum value of RSRP. If this option is deselected,
closed-loop power control for the PUSCH does not
limit the maximum value of RSRP. If this option is
selected, the maximum value of RSRP cannot exceed
the RSRP value specified by the PuschRsrpHighThd
parameter in the CellPcAlgo MO. This option applies
OuterLoopPucchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
outer-loop PUCCH power control. Outer-loop
PUCCH power control is enabled only when this
FDD and LTE TDD. PucchInitialPcSwitch: Indicates
whether to apply fast PUCCH power control on newly
accessed UEs. Fast PUCCH power control is applied
to newly accessed UEs only when this option is
selected. This option applies only to LTE FDD.
GroupPCForPucchSwitch: Indicates whether to enable
group power control for the PUCCH in dynamic
scheduling mode. This option applies only to LTE
TDD and requires UEs' support of group power
control for the PUCCH. This option applies only to
LTE TDD.
NearBigPacketUeFastPcSwitch: Indicates whether to
enable fast power increase for large-packet UEs in the
cell center to counteract deep fading. Fast power
increase is enabled for large-packet UEs in the cell
center only if this option is selected. This option
applies only to LTE FDD. UlCaPuschPcOptSwitch: If

eRAN

nd
this option is selected, large-packet UEs near the cell

center can enter dual-transmission by decreasing the
transmit power spectrum. This helps increase the
uplink throughput when there are available SCC
resources. If this option is deselected, dual-
transmission conditions are met only when UEs are
very close to the cell center. UEs near the cell center
cannot enter dual-transmission. This option applies
SpecUePUSCHPcOptSwitch: If this option is
selected, the transmit power spectrum of target UEs
increases in cells for which WTTx device-pipe
synergy is enabled, increasing the uplink throughput.
If this option is deselected, the transmit power
spectrum of such UEs does not increase. This option
GUI Value Range:
CloseLoopSpsSwitch(CloseLoopSpsSwitch),
InnerLoopPuschSwitch(InnerLoopPuschSwitch),
InnerLoopPucchSwitch(InnerLoopPucchSwitch),
CloseLoopOptPUSCHS-
witch(CloseLoopOptPUSCHSwitch),
PucchPcDtxSinrSwitch(PucchPcDtxSinrSwitch),
PuschIoTCtrlSwitch(PuschIoTCtrlSwitch),
SrsPcSwitch(SrsPcSwitch),
NearPointUeOptPUSCHS-
witch(NearPointUeOptPUSCHSwitch),
PuschRsrpHighThdSwitch(PuschRsrpHighThd-
Switch), OuterLoopPucchSwitch(OuterLoopPucchS-
witch), PucchInitialPcSwitch(PucchInitialPcSwitch),
GroupPCForPucchSwitch(GroupPCForPucchSwitch),
NearBigPacketUeFastPcSwitch(NearBigPacketUe-
FastPcSwitch), UlCaPuschPcOptS-
witch(UlCaPuschPcOptSwitch),
SpecUePUSCHPcOptSwitch(SpecUePUSCHPcOptS-
witch)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: CloseLoopSpsSwitch,
InnerLoopPuschSwitch, InnerLoopPucchSwitch,
CloseLoopOptPUSCHSwitch, PucchPcDtxSinrS-
witch, PuschIoTCtrlSwitch, SrsPcSwitch,
NearPointUeOptPUSCHSwitch, PuschRsrpHighThd-
Switch, OuterLoopPucchSwitch, PucchInitialPcS-
witch, GroupPCForPucchSwitch, NearBigPacketUe-
FastPcSwitch, UlCaPuschPcOptSwitch,
SpecUePUSCHPcOptSwitch

eRAN

nd
Default Value: CloseLoopSpsSwitch:Off,

InnerLoopPuschSwitch:On, InnerLoopPucchS-
witch:On, CloseLoopOptPUSCHSwitch:Off,
PucchPcDtxSinrSwitch:On, PuschIoTCtrlSwitch:Off,
SrsPcSwitch:On, NearPointUeOptPUSCHSwitch:Off,
PuschRsrpHighThdSwitch:Off, OuterLoopPucchS-
witch:Off, PucchInitialPcSwitch:On,
GroupPCForPucchSwitch:Off, NearBigPacketUe-
FastPcSwitch:Off, UlCaPuschPcOptSwitch:Off,
SpecUePUSCHPcOptSwitch:Off
SRSCfg TddSrsC MOD TDLBF Physical Meaning: Indicates the SRS configuration for LTE
fgMode SRSCF D-00200 Channel TDD. If this parameter is set to ACCESS_FIRST, the
G 3 Manage SRS configuration designed to preferentially
LST TDLAO ment guarantee the number of accessed UEs and BHCA is
SRSCF FD-081 DL 4- used. If this parameter is set to
G 409 Layer EXPERIENCE_FIRST, the SRS configuration
MIMO designed to preferentially guarantee user experience
TDLEO (for example, beamforming performance) is used. If
FD-121 Based
on TM9 this parameter is set to EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED,
615 downlink experience improves compared with that
TDLOF DL obtained when this parameter is set to
D-00104 Flexible ACCESS_FIRST. If this parameter is set to
9 3D- ACCESS_ENHANCED, more UEs can access the
Beamfor network compared with that obtained when this
ming parameter is set to EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED. The
Single values EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED and
Streami ACCESS_ENHANCED are not supported by the
ng LBBPc. If this parameter is set to
Beamfor EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED or
ming ACCESS_ENHANCED for a cell established on an
LBBPc board, the value is automatically changed to
ACCESS_FIRST when this parameter takes effect.
This parameter applies only to LTE TDD.
GUI Value Range: ACCESS_FIRST(Access First),
EXPERIENCE_FIRST(Experience First),
EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED(Experience Enhanced),
ACCESS_ENHANCED(Access Enhanced)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: ACCESS_FIRST,
EXPERIENCE_FIRST,
EXPERIENCE_ENHANCED,
ACCESS_ENHANCED
Default Value: ACCESS_ENHANCED(Access
Enhanced)

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 7 Counters
7 Counters
Table 7-1 Counters

Counter ID Counter Name Counter Feature ID Feature Name
Description
1526726737 L.ChMeas.PRB.UL Average number of Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

.Used.Avg used uplink PRBs GSM: None Basic Scheduling
UMTS: None Adaptive SFN/
LTE: SDMA
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526727391 L.ChMeas.MIMO.P Total number of Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

RB.CL.Rank1 used downlink GSM: None Basic Scheduling
PRBs in closed-
loop rank 1 mode UMTS: None DL 2x2 MIMO
LTE: DL 4x2 MIMO
LBFD-002025 DL 4x4 MIMO
TDLBFD-002025 Adaptive SFN/
LOFD-001001 SDMA
LOFD-001003 Virtual 4T4R
LOFD-001060 DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

PRBs in closed-
LTE: DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001 SDMA
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

RB.OL.Rank1 used downlink GSM: None Basic Scheduling
PRBs in open-loop
rank 1 mode UMTS: None DL 2x2 MIMO
LTE: DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001 SDMA
TDLOFD-001001
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

PRBs in open-loop
LTE: DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001 SDMA
TDLOFD-001001
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
TDLBFD-002025 Virtual 4T4R
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

PRBs in open-loop
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

PRBs in open-loop
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LOFD-070205
LEOFD-111305
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None
1526728259 L.Thrp.bits.UL Total uplink traffic Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

volume for PDCP GSM: None Management
PDUs in a cell Radio Bearer
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002008 Basic Scheduling
TDLBFD-002008 Basic Scheduling
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526728297 L.UL.Interference. Maximum uplink Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

Max interference and GSM: None Management
noise received by Physical Channel
each PRB in a cell UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002003 Adaptive SFN/
SDMA
TDLBFD-002003
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526728298 L.UL.Interference. Average uplink Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

Avg interference and GSM: None Management
Management
LTE:
SDMA
TDLBFD-002003
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526728304 L.ChMeas.CCE.UL Number of PDCCH Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

Used CCEs used for GSM: None Management
uplink DCI in a Physical Channel
measurement period UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002003
TDLBFD-002003
NR: None
1526728349 L.ChMeas.VMIMO Number of RBs that Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

.PairPRB.Succ are successfully GSM: None UL 2x2 MU-MIMO
paired for VMIMO
UEs in a cell UMTS: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
LOFD-001002
LOFD-001058
NR: None

eRAN

Description

.PairPRB.Tot can be paired for GSM: None UL 2x2 MU-MIMO
VMIMO UEs in a
cell UMTS: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
LOFD-001002
LOFD-001058
NR: None
1526728435 L.UL.Interference. Minimum uplink Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

Min interference and GSM: None Management
Management
LTE:
SDMA
TDLBFD-002003
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526728599 L.ChMeas.PRB.DL Number of PRBs on Multi-mode: None Modulation: DL/UL

.RANK1.MCS.0 the PDSCH in rank GSM: None QPSK, DL/UL
1 mode using MCS 16QAM, DL
index 0 for UMTS: None 64QAM
scheduling in a cell LTE: DL 2x2 MIMO
LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLBFD-001005 16QAM, DL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM
TDLOFD-001060 DL 2x2 MIMO
NR: None DL 4x4 MIMO

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description
1526728764 L.ChMeas.PRB.PU Average number of Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

SCH.Avg used PUSCH PRBs GSM: None Basic Scheduling
UMTS: None Adaptive SFN/
LTE: SDMA
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526728774 L.RRC.ConnSetup. Average RRC Multi-mode: None RRC Connection

TimeAvg connection setup GSM: None Management
duration RRC Connection
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002007
TDLBFD-002007
NR: None
1526728775 L.RRC.ConnSetup. Maximum RRC Multi-mode: None RRC Connection

TimeMax connection setup GSM: None Management
duration RRC Connection
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002007
TDLBFD-002007
NR: None
1526728776 L.E- Average E-RAB Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

RAB.Est.TimeAvg setup duration in a GSM: None Management
cell Radio Bearer
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002008
TDLBFD-002008
NR: None
1526728777 L.E- Maximum E-RAB Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

RAB.Est.TimeMax setup duration in a GSM: None Management
cell Radio Bearer
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002008
TDLBFD-002008
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526728998 L.Thrp.Time.Cell.U Total duration of Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

L.HighPrecision uplink data GSM: None Management
transmission in a Radio Bearer
cell (with the UMTS: None
Management
precision of 1 ms) LTE:
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
NR: None
1526729049 L.Thrp.bits.UE.UL. Traffic volume of Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

LastTTI uplink PDCP PDUs GSM: None Management
received in the last Radio Bearer
TTI before the UE UMTS: None
Management
buffer is empty LTE:
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
NR: None
1526729050 L.Thrp.Time.UE.U Uplink data Multi-mode: None Radio Bearer

L.RmvLastTTI transmit duration GSM: None Management
except the last TTI Radio Bearer
before the UE UMTS: None
Management
buffer is empty LTE:
LBFD-002025
TDLBFD-002025
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526729281 L.Traffic.DL.SCH. Number of TBs Multi-mode: None DL 2x2 MIMO

TB.CL.Rank1 transmitted in GSM: None DL 4x2 MIMO
downlink closed-
LTE: Transport Channel
LOFD-001001 Management
LOFD-001060 Transport Channel
LBFD-002002 Management
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

downlink closed-
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

TB.OL.Rank1 transmitted in GSM: None DL 4x2 MIMO
downlink open-loop
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

downlink open-loop
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

downlink closed-
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

downlink closed-
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

downlink open-loop
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

downlink open-loop
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None
1526729295 L.ChMeas.CCE.UL Number of PDCCH Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

Used.Equivalent CCEs with the CCE GSM: None Management
power equivalent to Dynamic Downlink
the reference power UMTS: None
Power Allocation
used for uplink DCI LTE:
LBFD-002003 Dynamic Downlink
Power Allocation
LBFD-002016
TDLBFD-002016
NR: None

eRAN

Description

TB.TM1 transmitted in GSM: None DL 4x2 MIMO
downlink TM1
mode UMTS: None DL 4x4 MIMO
TDLOFD-001001
TDLBFD-002002
NR: None

downlink TM2
TDLOFD-001001
TDLBFD-002002
NR: None

downlink TM3
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description

downlink TM4
TDLBFD-002002
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

downlink TM5
TDLOFD-001001
TDLBFD-002002
NR: None

downlink TM6
TDLOFD-001001
TDLBFD-002002
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526730141 L.ChMeas.RI.Rank Number of times Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

1 rank 1 is reported GSM: None DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS: None DL 4x2 MIMO
LTE: Basic Scheduling
LOFD-001003
TDLBFD-002025
TDLOFD-001001
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None
1526730142 L.ChMeas.RI.Rank Number of times Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

2 rank 2 is reported GSM: None DL 2x2 MIMO
LTE: Basic Scheduling
LOFD-001003
TDLBFD-002025
TDLOFD-001001
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

LBFD-001005
DL 4x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
DL 4x4 MIMO
LOFD-001003
Modulation: DL/UL
LOFD-001060
QPSK, DL/UL
TDLOFD-001001 64QAM

eRAN

Description
1526730844 L.ChMeas.CCE.UL Number of uplink Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

.AllocFail CCE allocation GSM: None Management
failures in a cell
UMTS: None
LTE:
LBFD-002003
NR: None
1526732723 L.Traffic.User.TM9 Average number of Multi-mode: None RRC Connection

.Avg UEs that apply GSM: None Management
TM9 in a cell RRC Connection
UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
TDLBFD-002007 DL 2x2 MIMO
LOFD-001001
LOFD-001060
NR: None
1526732737 L.ChMeas.RI.Rank Number of times a Multi-mode: None Basic Scheduling

3 UE reports rank 3 GSM: None DL 4x4 MIMO
UMTS: None Basic Scheduling
LTE: DL 4x4 MIMO
LBFD-002025
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

LTE: DL 4x4 MIMO
LBFD-002025
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
TDLOFD-001060
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526737656 L.CellSectorEQUIP Average RSSI of Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

.UL.RSSI.Avg.Ant0 antenna 0 in a set of GSM: None Management
cell sector Physical Channel
equipment UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002003
TDLBFD-002003
NR: None
1526737663 L.CellSectorEQUIP Average RSSI of Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

.UL.RSSI.Avg.Ant7 antenna 7 in a set of GSM: None Management
cell sector Physical Channel
equipment UMTS: None
Management
LTE:
LBFD-002003
TDLBFD-002003
NR: None

.PairPRB2Layer.Su are successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
cc paired for VMIMO
layer2 UEs in a cell UMTS: None
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526739789 L.ChMeas.VMIMO Number of RBs for Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

.PairPRB.Succ.VoL VMIMO VoLTE GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
TE UEs that are paired
successfully in a UMTS: None
cell LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None
1526740469 L.ChMeas.VMIMO Number of Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

.Succ.SubFrameNu subframes that are GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
m successfully paired
for VMIMO UEs in UMTS: None
a cell . LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None
1526743709 L.UL.Interference.L Linear average Multi-mode: None Physical Channel

inearAvg value of PRB-level GSM: None Management
interference noise Physical Channel
detected in the UMTS: None
Management
uplink LTE:
SDMA
TDLBFD-002003
LOFD-070205
NR: None
1526743750 L.ChMeas.ULMIM Total number of Multi-mode: None UL SU-MIMO

O.PRB.CL.Rank1 used uplink PRBs GSM: None UL SU-MIMO
in closed-loop
MIMO rank 1 UMTS: None
mode. LTE:
TDLOFD-120201
LOFD-130201
NR: None
1526743751 L.ChMeas.ULMIM Total number of Multi-mode: None UL SU-MIMO

O.PRB.CL.Rank2 used uplink PRBs GSM: None UL SU-MIMO
in closed-loop
MIMO rank 2 mode UMTS: None
LTE:
TDLOFD-120201
LOFD-130201
NR: None

eRAN

Description

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None

cc paired for VMIMO
LTE:
TDLOFD-001058
TDLOFD-081205
NR: None
1526746003 L.ChMeas.Ant.Cali Number of antenna Multi-mode: None DL 2x2 MIMO

bration.Num calibration GSM: None
coefficient updates
UMTS: None
LTE:
TDLOFD-001001
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526746681 L.Traffic.User.ULS Average number of Multi-mode: None UL SU-MIMO

UMIMO.Avg UEs configured GSM: None UL SU-MIMO
with uplink SU-
MIMO in a cell UMTS: None
LTE:
TDLOFD-120201
LOFD-130201
NR: None

LTE: 3D Beamforming
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

LTE: 3D Beamforming
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

LTE: 3D Beamforming
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

eRAN

Description

LTE: 3D Beamforming
LOFD-001060
TDLBFD-002025
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LOFD-001060 3D Beamforming
LEOFD-111305
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LEOFD-111305
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

eRAN

Description

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LEOFD-111305
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

PRBs in closed-
LTE: Adaptive SFN/
LBFD-002025 SDMA
LEOFD-111305
LEOFD-121204
TDLAOFD-130490
NR: None

TB.TM9 transmitted in the GSM: None DL 4x2 MIMO
downlink in TM9
TDLOFD-001001 eMIMO
TDLBFD-002002
LEOFD-111307
NR: None

eRAN

Description
1526747756 L.Traffic.VMIMO. Number of TBs Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

2ndLayer.TB successfully paired GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
for uplink MU-
MIMO UEs at layer UMTS: None UL 2x64 MU-
2 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-001058 UL 4-Layer MU-
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121603 UL 8-Layer MU-
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

3rdLayer.TB successfully paired GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
for uplink MU-
3 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

4thLayer.TB successfully paired GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
for uplink MU-
4 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

for uplink MU-
5 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

for uplink MU-
6 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

for uplink MU-
7 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

for uplink MU-
8 LTE: MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None
1526747763 L.Traffic.VMIMO. Number of TBs that Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

2ndLayer.ErrTB are successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
paired but fail to be
transmitted for UMTS: None UL 2x64 MU-
uplink MU-MIMO LTE: MIMO
UEs at layer 2 TDLOFD-001058 UL 4-Layer MU-
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

3rdLayer.ErrTB are successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

4thLayer.ErrTB are successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None
1526747770 L.Traffic.VMIMO. Number of bits in Multi-mode: None UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

2ndLayer.TB.bits TBs successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

3rdLayer.TB.bits TBs successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

4thLayer.TB.bits TBs successfully GSM: None UL 2x8 MU-MIMO
paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN

Description

paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

paired and
TDLOFD-081205 MIMO
02 MIMO
TDLEOFD-121609
TDLEOFD-121610
NR: None

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 8 Glossary
8 Glossary
For the acronyms, abbreviations, terms, and definitions, see Glossary.

eRAN
MIMO Feature Parameter Description 9 Reference Documents
9 Reference Documents
1. 3GPP TS 36.211, "Physical Channels and Modulation"

2. 3GPP TS 36.213, "Physical layer procedures"
3. 3GPP TS 36.306, "User Equipment (UE) radio access capabilities"
4. 3GPP TR 36.814, "Physical Layer Aspects"
5. eMIMO (FDD)
6. Hardware Description

MIMO (eRAN13.1 02)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MIMO (eRAN13.1 02)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

eRAN

MIMO Feature Parameter

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

2 About This Document.................................................................................................................. 4

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

4.1.5.1.2 Using MML Commands...................................................................................................................................... 18

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

5.3.4.1 Data Configuration................................................................................................................................................. 76

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

5.8.3.3 Hardware.............................................................................................................................................................. 107

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

1.1 eRAN13.1 02 (2019-01-21)

1.2 eRAN13.1 01 (2018-04-10)

1.3 eRAN13.1 Draft C (2018-03-30)

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

1.4 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (FDD)

1.5 eRAN13.1 Draft B (2018-02-05) (TDD)

1.6 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (FDD)

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Removed the single frequency None l 3900 and

Removed uplink multi-cluster None

Optimized CRS port mapping Added parameters: 3900 and 5900

1.7 eRAN13.1 Draft A (2017-12-29) (TDD)

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

2 About This Document

2.1 Applicable RAT

2.2 Features in This Document

Feature ID Feature Name Section

LOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO 4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO

LOFD-001003 DL 4x2 MIMO 4.6 DL 4x2 MIMO (FDD)

LOFD-001060 DL 4x4 MIMO 4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO

LBFD-00202001 UL 2-Antenna Receive 5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive

LOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive 5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive

LOFD-001002 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO 5.4 UL 2x2 MU-MIMO (FDD)

LOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO 5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

LOFD-130201 UL SU-MIMO 5.8 UL SU-MIMO

This document describes the following TDD features:

Feature ID Feature Name Section

TDLOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO 4.5 DL 2x2 MIMO

TDLOFD-001060 DL 4x4 MIMO 4.7 DL 4x4 MIMO

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

Feature ID Feature Name Section

TDLBFD-00202001 UL 2-Antenna Receive 5.1 UL 2-Antenna Receive

TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive 5.2 UL 4-Antenna Receive

TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive 5.3 UL 8-Antenna Receive

TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO 5.5 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO 5.6 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)

TDLOFD-130203 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO 5.7 UL 4x8 MU-MIMO (TDD)

TDLOFD-120201 UL SU-MIMO 5.8 UL SU-MIMO

2.3 Feature Differences Between FDD and TDD

LOFD-001 DL 2x2 TDLOFD- DL 2x2 None 4.5 DL 2x2

LOFD-001 DL 4x2 N/A N/A This feature is 4.6 DL 4x2

LOFD-001 DL 4x4 TDLOFD- DL 4x4 None 4.7 DL 4x4

LBFD-002 UL 2- TDLBFD- UL 2- None 5.1 UL 2-

LOFD-001 UL 4- TDLOFD- UL 4- None 5.2 UL 4-

N/A N/A TDLOFD- UL 8- This feature is 5.3 UL 8-

Issue 02 (2019-01-21) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5